Regulation 19 Publication Draft, June 2019 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 FOREWORD CONTENTS

FOREWORD

City Plan 2019–2040, first and foremost, is a plan for living must inform the choices we make – sometimes people. It sets out to deliver an ambitious strategy to literally. Soft landscaping and streets lined with trees, make Westminster one of the best places to live, work bring natural beauty and mitigate against the harmful and play. Not just in London or the UK, but globally. effects of CO2. A stunning city encourages walking and cycling, bringing further environmental benefits. Although this plan projects us forward to 2040, the transformation starts now. Being a city where people With higher rents and changing patterns of how people want to live is at the forefront of our agenda. Whilst a shop, bold action will ensure London’s West End remains quarter of all homes in Westminster are social rented the jewel in our commercial crown. This strategy sets out – a statistic of which we are very proud – we have a a game-changing Central Activities Zone (CAZ) to deliver pressing need for new, affordable homes. Regeneration a world-class leisure experience. We’re investing £150 of key areas such as Victoria and Paddington, million over the next three years to deliver our ambitious and the north west of the borough, will invigorate Oxford Street Place Strategy and Delivery Plan. This both our residential and business capabilities. includes more than 90 projects aimed at improving and enhancing the whole district, including its residential It’s absolutely vital that development must never be neighbourhoods, while securing its future as a global at the expense of our heritage. Our new approach to destination, with an unrivalled experience and visitor offer. managing development will make sure planning for Westminster is about conservation not just preservation, As we set out to create our city of the future, there is one and building tomorrow’s heritage today. Our iconic question that should be at the forefront of our minds in every landmarks and outstanding heritage form a stunning development we undertake: Will this be an asset to people’s backdrop where people build lives, forge careers, lives? If we can answer this positively every time, the and make memories. We have identified ‘specialist Westminster of 2040 is one we will all want to be a part of. clusters’ to be protected; places whose character adds significantly to London’s global appeal, such as Soho, Mayfair, Harley Street and Savile Row.

Sustainability must drive everything we do. This Councillor Richard Beddoe strategy defines what we need to achieve and how Cabinet Member for Place Shaping and Planning innovative planning and design will achieve it. Greener Westminster City Council

3 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOW TO USE THIS PLAN CONTENTS CONTENTS

HOW TO USE THIS PLAN

This is the City Plan for Westminster to 2040. Step 3: Some policies in the Plan deal with While each of the policies hold equal weight, Along with the Mayor of London’s London Plan and different types of use. This helps to determine particular attention should be paid to Policy 7. any neighbourhood plans which may be made in whether a use or change of use of a building is As this policy is concerned with neighbourly future, it is the statutory development plan setting appropriate or not. The contents pages and development and primarily managing amenity out our vision and strategy for the development of specific topic-based chapters should also help impacts, it is important to read this policy the city, and contains policies that will be used in you identify the relevant policies. alongside all other policies in the Plan when determining planning applications.1 determining impacts and potential mitigation. Step 4: Other policies set out requirements for on these sites. If you are submitting, assessing or commenting the form that the development should take and on applications, or want to find out more about the any measures needed to mitigate its impacts. Appendix 3 identifies our strategic policies and policies for your area: will be particularly helpful to anyone involved in The City Plan should be read as a whole to creating, or commenting on, neighbourhood plans. Step 1: Start with the vision and spatial strategy. understand if a development will be acceptable. They show the main areas for growth and Policies are not cross-referenced throughout the change in the city. Plan, however there are many interrelated issues across the chapters which should be considered Step 2: Consult the ‘policies map’ that goes in tandem. with this plan. It shows where the policies apply. You can use this to find the policies that relate to your site or area of interest. The map also shows ‘key development sites’ and Appendix 1 provides further guidance on the types and scale of use that we expect to see on these sites.

1 Under section 38(6) of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 planning decisions should be taken in accordance with the statutory development plan unless material planning considerations indicate otherwise.

4 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS CONTENTS CONTENTS

CONTENTS

CONTEXT 8 Housing Policies 52 8. Stepping up housing delivery 54 OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER 22 9. Affordable housing 57 OBJECTIVES 24 10. Affordable contributions in the CAZ 59 11. Housing for specific groups 61 Spatial Strategy Policies 28 12. Innovative housing delivery 65 1. Westminster’s spatial strategy 30 13. Housing quality 67 2. Spatial Development Priorities: West End Retail and Leisure Special Policy Area 70 and Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area 34 Economy and Employment Policies 14. Supporting economic growth 72 3. Spatial Development Priorities: Paddington Opportunity Area 37 15. Town centres, high streets and the CAZ 75 4. Spatial Development Priorities: 16. Visitor Economy 82 Victoria Opportunity Area 40 17. Food, drink and entertainment 86 5. Spatial Development Priorities: 18. Community infrastructure and facilities 88 North West Economic Development Area 43 19. Education and skills 90 6. Spatial Development Priorities: Church Street / Edgware Road and 20. Digital infrastructure, information Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Renewal Areas 46 and communications technology 92 7. Managing development for Westminster’s people 50 21. Soho Special Policy Area 93 22. Mayfair and St. James’s Special Policy Areas 95 23. Harley Street Special Policy Area 97 24. Savile Row Special Policy Area 99

6 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS CONTENTS

Connections Policies 102 Design and Heritage Policies 144 25. Sustainable transport 104 39. Design principles 146 26. Walking and cycling 106 40. Westminster’s heritage 148 27. Public transport and infrastructure 109 41. Townscape and architecture 155 28. Parking 112 42. Building height 160 29. Highway access and management 116 43. Building height in the housing renewal areas 164 30. Freight and servicing 119 44. Public realm 164 31. Technological innovation in transport 121 45. Security measures in the public realm 169 32. Waterways and waterbodies 122 46. Basement developments 170 Environment Policies 126 33. Air quality 128 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING 172 34. Local environmental impacts 130 APPENDIX 1: KEY DEVELOPMENT SITES 180 35. Green infrastructure 132 36. Flood risk 136 APPENDIX 2: PARKING STANDARDS 192 37. Energy 139 APPENDIX 3: SCHEDULE OF STRATEGIC POLICIES 194 38. Waste management 142 GLOSSARY 198

7 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS CONTENTS

43AD 50AD 460 600

First London road network Founding of London The Roman army The Saxons CONTEXT Roads built in the first phase of Roman (Londinium) leaves Britain create a new occupation (43–68 AD) connected London The Roman Governor and London is town at Covent with the ports used in the invasion, and with of Britain (Ostorius abandoned Garden Westminster Timeline the earlier legionary bases at Colchester, Scapula) gives orders Lincoln, Wroxeter, Gloucester and Exeter. to build a permanent As Roman influence expanded, so did the base on the North network, until around 180 AD when the Bank of the Thames. known network was complete.

1928 1903 1876 1865 1863 1862

1928 Thames flood Westminster Parliament is Bazalgette’s sewer The first London The new The 1928 Thames flood was a Cathedral is reconstructed system opened, leading Underground line Westminster disastrous flood of the River completed to the construction of opens between Bridge is opened Thames that affected much of Victoria Embankment Paddington and riverside London on 7 January Farringdon 1928. As a result 14 people died and thousands were made homeless.

1940 1947 1956 1965

Blitz Town and Country Planning Act Clean Air Act Westminster’s current boundary During the Blitz two million The Town and Country Planning Act The borough as we know it today was created with the houses (60% of these in 1947 came into effect on 1 July 1948, 1965 establishment of Greater London. Upon its creation, London) were destroyed which was the foundation of modern it inherited the city status previously held by the smaller resulting in redevelopment town and country planning in the UK. Metropolitan Borough of Westminster from 1900, which and the emergence of was first awarded to Westminster in 1540. council estates being built.

8 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

960 1066 1735 1746 1814 1825 1828

Westminster Great Fire of London First Prime Minister First detailed map Lords Cricket Regent Street London Zoo Abbey first The Great Fire of 1666 in 10 Downing Street of London Ground opens layout complete opens to the founded destroyed four-fifths of the John Rocque created the public City of London and more first detailed map of London. than 13,000 medieval, His 1746 map includes every Tudor and early-17th named court and alleyway. century buildings were lost. It shows a much smaller city, with areas like Bloomsbury and Marylebone largely undeveloped.

1860 1851 1839 1838 1837 1834

Victoria Royal Parks Trafalgar Square construction Paddington Buckingham Parliament is station opens become public Trafalgar Square’s name Station opens Palace completed destroyed Victoria station opened Royal Parks become commemorates the Battle of due to fire by Victoria Station public parks with the Trafalgar, a British naval victory in and Pimlico Railway. introduction of the the Napoleonic Wars with France Crown Lands Act 1851. and Spain that took place on 21 October 1805 off the coast of Cape Trafalgar, Spain.

1970 2002 2003 2012 2019 2019 2019 2023 2028

Westway opens Golden Jubilee London London Ultra Low Brexit due Crossrail Thames Heathrow Footbridge joining Congestion Olympic Emission Zone to take due to open Tideway due to expansion due Embankment to Charge comes Games (ULEZ) comes place be completed to be completed Southbank opens into force into force

9 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Stretching just over eight square miles, Westminster is one of London’s largest central boroughs and one of only two to have city status. Much of Westminster is within the Central Activities Zone (CAZ) which is a designation set by the Mayor of London to guide planning policies.

We are home to many of the landmarks synonymous with ‘tourist London’. We have some of the most affluent residential areas in the country, but a diverse demographic means also some of the most deprived (see Figures 1 and 2). Ours is a densely populated borough, with 114 people per hectare; almost double the London average of 56.1 This means that space is at a premium, so we must ensure its most effective use.

1 ONS, Population Estimates 2017

Figure 1. London Central Activities Zone

10 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

Figure 2. Levels of deprivation in Westminster. Source: ONS Index of Multiple Deprivation 2015

11 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS CONTENTS

Mixed 6% White British and Irish 31% Other Ethnic Group 4%

Arab 9%

Other Black 1% Black Caribbean 2%

Black African 4%

Other Asian 5%

Chinese 2%

Bangladeshi 3% Pakistani 1% Indian 3% Other White 29%

Figure 3 . Westminster’s ethnic mix. Source: GLA 2016-based ethnic group population projection

12 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS 90+ 872 649

85-89 1472 1207 Female Male 80-84 2459 1968

75-79 2915 2603

70-74 4149 3846

65-69 5027 4327

60-64 5792 5173

55-59 6755 6697

50-54 7710 8240

45-49 7928 9149

40-44 8711 10605

35-39 10420 13686

30-34 11736 14261

25-29 10988 12701

20-24 7768 8693

15-19 5955 6478

10-14 5851 6273

5-9 6891 7198

0-4 6258 6477

Figure 4. Age mix in Westminster2

2 City Intelligence, 2018

13 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

The average mean household income in We have identified existing housing estates which Housing Westminster is £52,199, yet the median house are in need of renewal – Church Street, Ebury price was £1,054,400 in 2017. That’s nearly two Bridge and Tollgate. The renewal of these estates 121,000 households with 31% owner occupied, times higher than London as a whole, and almost will bring about much needed housing growth and 40% private rented, 26% social rented five times higher than that of the UK.3 There is high improvements to existing stock. Other housing and 3% other tenure contrast in income between different wards with an estates may be identified by us in future for renewal. Median property price average mean income of £62,074 in Knightsbridge £1,054,400 and Belgravia compared to £31,601 in Church The local housing market assessment6 has Street. Rental property prices now top the identified the need for 316 intermediate £3,000-a-month mark.4 Lack of intermediate homes and 247 social homes each year. housing stock means that less than 2% of homes City Plan 2019 – 2040 looks to support innovation are available for people who can’t afford to rent and delivery, with an emphasis that is people- Incomes on the open market but are ineligible for social focussed. It is essential that affordable doesn’t housing – creating a unique problem. mean inferior quality but enhances the quality Average household income: of life for those who live here. £52,199 This is an issue further compounded by a growing population. ONS Population Projections estimate There are 3,100 homes within the city declared that Westminster’s population will increase to as second homes with many more used as short 276,150 by 2040.5 term lets. It is estimated that 12% of the housing stock is empty. Population 247,600 including 44,200 children 3 Average Property Price, Land Registry 2017 Population increases to 1.1 million 4 Valuation Office Agency (VOA) data workers with the influx of workers, 5 ONS Population Projections 2016 shoppers and tourists in the day time

6 Westminster Housing Market Assessment, 2019

14 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

Neighbourhood Planning is a key tool to ensuring Westminster’s unique historic environment is Heritage good growth within Westminster and the City Plan an irreplaceable resource, with an exceptional provides the framework for emerging neighbourhood concentration of heritage assets, one of the highest 11,000 listed buildings and structures plans to follow to deliver that growth for their areas. of any local authority in the country. These date including the Westminster World Heritage The council strongly supports and encourages from all eras and alongside more recent buildings, Site, 5 royal parks and 19 historic squares neighbourhood planning in Westminster, as help tell the story of Westminster’s continuing and gardens evidenced by almost all of the city being covered by growth and development. designated neighbourhood areas. Within the majority 56 conservation areas of these areas, designated local neighbourhood We have more than 11,000 listed buildings and covering 78% of the forums have the power to make neighbourhood structures, with over 200 of them being Grade I city’s footprint plans. The council will engage with and advise these listed including Buckingham Palace, the National 23 Historic Parks forums as their plans are prepared. The Knightsbridge Gallery, the Royal Albert Hall and 10 Downing Neighbourhood Plan was the first neighbourhood Street. Westminster Cathedral, is another world 85 London Squares plan to be formally made. renowned example of a historic building within Westminster that is highly symbolic and serves a 3 scheduled monuments Westminster is home to a number of internationally very important religious function attracting not renowned educational institutions such as King’s only local residents but visitors from afar. College London, London School of Economics and Political Sciences, University of Westminster, Perhaps the best known listed building is Imperial College London, University of the Arts and The Palace of Westminster – one of the most many others. They are a huge asset as they help to iconic and significant buildings in the world, boost local economies and with both national and which, alongside Westminster Abbey and international reputations they make Westminster an St Margaret’s Church, forms the Westminster attractive place to come and study. World Heritage Site, recognised by UNESCO as having outstanding universal value.

15 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Figure 5. Neighbourhood planning in Westminster (N.B. Queen’s Park is not a neighbourhood forum, but instead is Westminster’s only Community Council)

16 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

This rich heritage contributes to the townscape Economy Employment by Sector and distinctiveness of different areas within the city but also brings many wider benefits including Highest economic output 38% Professional, business admin, finance being a major draw for tourists to the city and is of any local authority at one of the reasons why many businesses choose £53.6 billion per annum 10% Property services to locate here. Largest night time economy 9% Retail There are also 56 conservation areas, which cover in the UK, generating £3 billion 78% of our city, three scheduled monuments and per annum towards the UK’s many areas rich in archaeological potential as well as economic output 9% IT and communications 23 registered historic parks and gardens. 754,000 jobs 9% Arts, entertainment, recreation With such a special historic environment this is a critical factor in managing development and 8% Manufacturing, construction, utilities change in the city. Westminster’s built environment is constantly evolving with 6,283 planning applications processed in 2018; 1,791 of these 7% Accommodation, food services were for listed buildings.7 5% Public admin, education Our challenge goes beyond conserving our historical legacy, to one where we must find ways 5% Wholesale, transport, storage of developing which enhance it, retaining and integrating those buildings and features which contribute positively to Westminster’s sense of place into new development to allow the city to grow in a way which retains its distinctiveness.

7 Based on figures returned to MHCLG

17 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS CONTENTS

A vibrant and attractive city creates a vibrant Westminster is home to numerous uses and economy. Westminster’s commercial activity functions of national and international importance reverberates at a national level. The scale and including the seat of Government, cultural diversity of our 55,000 businesses is a key factor institutions, higher education Institutions, sporting in our sustained growth. From our large retailers venues such as Lord’s Cricket Ground, and many on Oxford Street to our many local street markets, research and medicine facilities. These help to Westminster has a range of commercial and boost the economy as workers, students, visitors shopping activities that helped contribute £53.6 and tourists spend time in Westminster. Many of billion in gross value added (GVA) in 2015; 14.2% the buildings that feature these uses have great of London’s total and 3.2% of that of the UK.8 historical value and contribute positively to local areas and the heritage of the city. Whilst professional, business and financial industries make up the largest sector, we’re also a Westminster is home to various unique areas and global hub for creative industries with 27% of all neighbourhoods each with distinctive townscape London’s jobs in music, performing arts and visual character and serving different functions and uses. arts based within the city. Westminster is home to Many of these areas are rich in history and more than 130 major cultural establishments such heritage assets and have widely recognised as Tate Britain and the National Gallery. Many reputations making them unique. Savile Row for cultural activities and programmes also take place example is well known for its suit tailoring, while in Westminster such as the City of Sculpture Soho offers a mix of small independent shopping programme and ‘Fourth Plinth’ art Installations and a vibrant night life. at Trafalgar Square.

8 Greater London Authority Economics, Current Issues Note 55: Examining GVA in London’s local authorities in a London and UK context, 1997-2015 (September 2017)

18 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTENTS

Many famous attractions make Westminster a very Westminster 13.6% popular destination for tourists and visitors alike. Other 25 Boroughs The West End provides a vibrant night life shown City of London 9.7% by the huge economic output. There are nearly 48.3% 500 hotels, 56 theatres and 21 LGBTQI+ night time venues.9 Hotels are an integral part of the CAZ generating both direct and indirect spending in Camden 7% the local economy. There are a range of hotels in Westminster accommodating for different budgets - from well-known historic hotels such as the Ritz and the Savoy to the smaller local hotels. Tower Hamlets 5.7% The GLA estimates that between 2016–2041 there will be a need for approximately 75,000 additional office-based jobs in Westminster.10 Over the Plan period an increased demand for Southwark 4.6% other commercial spaces, including hotels, retail and leisure developments is also expected, Islington 4.3% meaning additional commercial floorspace of a range of types will be required. Hillingdon 3.7% Hounslow 3.2%

Figure 6. Proportion of London’s jobs within each borough 2015-1611 9 maps.london.gov.uk/cim/index.html 10 London Office Policy Review, 2017 11 Business Register and Employment Survey 2015 / 16

19 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Main Airport Links Population density puts pressure on every aspect of our infrastructure. A constant challenge is how Luton Heathrow Stansted Gatwick City our 1.1 million daytime population moves around the city. Increased capacity, more ‘joined-up travel’, greater efficiency and more sustainable transport options, as well as more choice is needed to meet 4 Terminal Train Station increasing demand.

Charing Cross Paddington Marylebone Victoria The structure of our city is also a major contributor to CO2 emissions. In the UK, buildings are responsible for around 40% of CO2 emissions. In Westminster that figure is more than double Elizabeth Line Stations at around 90%. This not only wastes energy but amplifies the Urban Heat Island affect. The Mayor Bond Street Paddington Tottenham Court Road of London’s target is to reduce emissions by 60% by 2025. This target informs everything we do as we strive towards being a Cleaner Air City. Regeneration of our waterways, canals and streets Canal Frontage to promote greener travel options and encourage walking and cycling is essential if we are to meet our ambitious carbon reduction targets.

Air quality isn’t the only pollution issue Westminster faces. We have a responsibility to 6.4km address all forms of pollution. Westminster receives the highest number of noise complaints in London. Light pollution wastes energy, detracts from the character of our conservation areas and can negatively impact on health.

20 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONTEXT CONTENTS

Westminster is home to many high-quality sporting Air Quality facilities and open green spaces with significant 4 river bus terminals investment over the past decade. There are six swimming pools, 16 physical activity centres and 58 park-based sports facilities within the city.12 Exceedence over 26% Several regular sporting events take place in the WHO and EU Limits city including the London Marathon and the 32 underground stations Westminster Mile. Enabling residents to stay active is crucial to their health and well-being but it also contributes to the local economy and relieves Road Transport stress on the health service. Our green spaces, 64.9% 150 + bus routes of total particulates parks and the River Thames frontages not only provide recreational opportunities but contribute to the character and attractiveness of the city and provide access to nature. In particular, our five Royal Parks are a huge asset to the city and as 170 cycle hire docking stations designated tranquil open spaces, they provide a welcome break from the urban environment.

The challenges we face are not insurmountable, in fact they afford us the great opportunity create a 350 km of highway sustainable city for all. Every action we undertake must enhance the lives of everyone who comes to our city, whether to live, work or visit.

City Plan 2019 – 2040 is a plan for people.

12 Active Westminster Strategy, 2018

21 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER CONTENTS CONTENTS

OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER A vision for homes like the regeneration of the Grand Union Canal, A city where people choose to and development of the north bank of the Thames and communities will open up even more of the city to a new live or work because it’s enriching. generation. We want every resident to be within Westminster will be a city where people feel they a five minute walk of an open space, so they have A city that focuses on the needs belong to connected and thriving communities. the benefits of a healthier life on their doorstep.

of our community and beyond. Affordable housing is at the heart of our vision. Living in Westminster should afford residents Through smart design and innovation we will have the opportunity to live the best life possible. A city that will be sustainable created not just enough new homes to meet our for generations to come. housing targets, but more crucially to exceed the expectations of the people who live here. A vision for a healthier City Plan 2019 – 2040 brings By 2040, at least 35% of all new homes delivered and greener city will be affordable. But that’s just part of the story. together our vision for Westminster. We need not only to create affordable housing, Improvements in our air quality will improve but the right kind of housing. That means providing our quality of life. the size and type of homes that take into account our changing demographic and the diverse needs Climate change is changing the way we do things. of everyone who lives here. Design will prioritise sustainable construction materials, with energy-efficiency on an equal footing The golden standard is for people of all ages and all as aesthetic appeal. We will be a world leader abilities to feel safe, and have a sense of belonging in sustainable design. Specialist attention will and enjoyment. Being able to connect with other be given to retrofitting our historic buildings, people will forge communities, improve well-being, so they can take their place in the modern world. and make social isolation a thing of the past. Our city will be characterised not just by our We want people to feel connected to nature even stunning built environment, but also our natural though they live in the heart of the city. Initiatives environment. Soft landscaping which weaves

22 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OUR APPROACH FOR WESTMINSTER CONTENTS

micro-habitats for wildlife into buildings and A vision for the right for leisure, because it will offer everything; spaces, whilst helping to mitigate the effects a place where people can shop, socialise and of CO2. By bringing nature into the city we inspire kind of growth be entertained. Our high streets will be vibrant active travel, as moving around the city becomes hubs of commercial activity, providing the kind a leisure activity in itself. The very best design, using the most innovative of experience that online retailing simply can’t technology will create the heritage of the future. compete with. The move away from petrol and diesel cars towards more energy efficient electric cars is going to be City Plan 2019 – 2040 sets out a blueprint for Soho is unique, and this plan will ensure it stays made easier by changes to our roads and more how Westminster will enter the next few decades that way. As an area in our ‘special clusters’ zone, electric vehicle charging points. Reduction in in a strong and competitive position. To do this we the focus will be on protecting its vibrant and traditional forms of traffic will improve our air need to be adaptable to change, but at the same cosmopolitan character that has made it such quality and considerably reduce our noise pollution. time conserve the character of a city with one a dynamic place to live, work and socialise. Multiple polluting delivery vehicles won’t be of the world’s most iconic skylines. clogging up our streets and pumping out fumes, Westminster is a powerhouse of business. Our because better, more convenient, options to Growth in the right kind of housing is a huge priority. offices showcase the very best in contemporary consolidate deliveries will exist. People want to live here; we need to create the design and we continue to attract the most dynamic conditions to make that happen. The most notable workforce. By 2040, our business landscape will By 2040 we will have regained our status as significant areas of housing growth will be seen in have grown to create some 63,000 new jobs. We’ll a ‘river city’, through a complete transformation the Victoria and Paddington Opportunity Areas as be setting the pace for changing working patterns of the north side of the Thames. A transformation new thriving streets with new homes and new jobs with office space and super digital connectivity that will bring a whole new dimension to the area, are created. The north west of the city will see allowing for more flexible working, giving people without impacting on the views of the iconic economic regeneration and housing developments a better work-life balance, and so better lives. buildings around. in Church Street and Ebury Bridge estates will bring a renewed vitality. A vitality that will resonate City Plan 2019 – 2040 will cement our reputation Over the course of the next 20 years Westminster’s throughout the city. as a place where people want to live, work and air quality will improve dramatically. contribute to our growth. An exciting, more creative approach to retail will It will feel like a healthier city because it will be offer residents and visitors alike a complete leisure a healthier city. experience. The West End will be the place to go

23 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS CONTENTS

OBJECTIVES

Increase the stock of high- These objectives all contribute to our commitment to improve quality housing and provide the health and well-being of the city’s residents and workers and variety in terms of size, type to help ensure Westminster is a place we can be proud to hand to and tenure to meet need and our successors. The objectives also contribute to the delivery of promote mixed and inclusive three key themes in the council’s ambition to make Westminster a communities, with a clear City for All: homes and communities, a healthier and greener city, focus on affordability and and opportunities for growth. The success of the Plan will be family homes. monitored against these objectives.

Enable job growth across a Enhance the West End Broaden the city’s cultural range of sectors vital to the as London’s primary retail, offer, while managing the UK economy, and ensure leisure, and visitor destination, impacts of clusters of uses, those from disadvantaged and ensure our town centres and of the evening and night backgrounds benefit from the and high streets can adapt time economies on existing opportunities this presents. to the challenges they face. residential communities.

24 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS

Enhance connections by Improve quality of life, Improve air quality, minimise improving options for cycling and climate resilience and tackle noise and other polluting walking, prioritising pedestrians, environmental challenges impacts, and reduce carbon improve interchange between by protecting, enhancing, and water demands by transport modes and incorporate expanding our valuable network minimising detrimental innovative solutions to manage of parks and open spaces. impacts from development. the highway network.

Promote quality in the design Making sure our Make the most of our of buildings and public spaces, neighbourhoods unique heritage and ensuring that Westminster continue to thrive. historic environment, while is attractive and welcoming. encouraging innovations in building technology and improving sense of place.

25 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS CONTENTS

A city with community at its heart.

Westminster is one of London’s most densely populated boroughs, with growth set to rise year on year. With this challenge comes the opportunity to transform the lives of the people who live here. This plan is key to that transformation.

By 2040 we will have created enough new homes to exceed our target for affordable homes.

But we’re not just looking to build homes, we’re looking to build communities.

Communities where every consideration has been given to the people who live there. Safe communities that bring people together. Healthy communities with green open spaces within a five minute walk where people can feel a million miles away from the everyday pressures of city life.

Communities where people can truly enjoy where they live.

26 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 OBJECTIVES CONTENTS

A healthier and greener Westminster.

The greener Westminster of 2040 is already being built. It’s one where everything we plan, everything we design, everything we build makes our city a more carbon-neutral, healthier place to live. The policies we set out will help us to deliver exactly that.

It’s about those little changes that make a big difference; maximising soft landscaping, planting more trees, being less wasteful. It’s protecting our open spaces so people can enjoy healthier, more active leisure time. It’s making greener travel the best travel because it’s more efficient, more pleasant and costs less. It’s creating buildings that are more energy efficient, making them cheaper Nurturing growth in Westminster to run and more comfortable to be in. Growth is the lifeblood of any city. But growth is only possible It’s a city that’s greener. A city that’s when that city is a rewarding place to live, work or visit. Here we healthier. A city that’s better. set out how new developments will help us build on our rich heritage to create an environment where people can enjoy more fulfilling leisure time. Creating more open spaces, making the most of our waterways, and expanding our retail offering.

Ambitious projects to regenerate Victoria, Paddington and the north west of the borough will bring a new vitality.

To sustain successful economic growth, it’s not enough just to attract new businesses. We also have to nurture them.

27 CONTENTS a city to buildinga city futures. This is aSpatial Strategy that looks beyond building unique contribution to our economy. to And us. haveMayfair enhanced protection, as each own brings its is paramount. Special Policy Areas like Soho, Harley Street and character, our design, our heritage our before.gone Preserving an needs, eye always but with on city what the jobs has growth and homes the deliver and toland create new possibilities Areas inspireOpportunity redevelopment the of brownfield of the Thames will create an exciting new buzz. bank affordable new homes. north the Transforming ofthrough range commercial a development, alongside Leisure Special Policy Area will bring significant jobs growth is to maximise our limited space. The West End Retail and To respond to we our need growth to develop; challenge the futures better Building SPATIAL STRATEGY

CONTENTS CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY A. Westminster’s strategy 1. spatial and inspire at the heart of London as a as ofLondon heart the at inspire and to grow, thrive continue will Westminster 1. by: City World 6. 5. 4. 3. 2.

Supporting intensification and Supporting including centres ofincluding international streets, high and centres town Supporting places. distinct most city’s the within of uses clusters accommodate specialist and the them, that buildings the importance, national uses of internationalProtecting and/or residential neighbourhoods. global office centre,and home to attraction, visitor and leisure destination, aretail as Zone (CAZ) Activities Central of the functions competing Balancing the jobs. office-based new 63,000 least at to provide space ofbusiness ofavariety growth, the and supporting loss, the Halting affordable as homes 35% ofnew with homes 22,222 Delivering land. use of efficient most to surroundings, their makewith the integrate and architecture of modern best the showcase that developments new in high quality densities optimising

B. 10. 4. 3. 2. 1. the: through delivered be will Growth 9. 8. 7.

Prioritising sustainable travel. sustainable Prioritising Area; and Area; West Economic DevelopmentNorth of regeneration the commercial-led Renewal Areas; Housing Estate Bridge Ebury and Road /Edgware Street ofChurch renewal and TottenhamVictoria Road; Court ofPaddington, Areas Opportunity continued redevelopment the within and our town centre hierarchy; End, West CAZ, the of intensification front destination. river Bank supporting the delivery of a new North North ofanew delivery the supporting environment and public realm, including to natural enhancements the Securing value. and townscape assets heritage unrivalled and enhancing city’s the Protecting socialise. socialise. and work, to shop, areas commercial to evolve as multifunctional Knightsbridge, and End West the in importance is delivered to facilitate growth. to facilitate delivered is infrastructure supporting sufficient Ensuring

design solutions to deliver additional growth. additional to deliver solutions design encourages high quality, creative and contemporary plan This out. as well as up buildings, to existing for infill developmentopportunities and extensions areas.urbanised This includes optimising existing to intensify necessary be will it city, the in growth To additional deliver of conservation. worthy space open valued highly and heritage with developed densely is already very /Westminster 1.3 Intensification and optimisation sources. and funding fortimescale delivery location, their projects, key infrastructure identify will It growth. to support needed key infrastructure the out set will (IDP) Plan Delivery Infrastructure /Our 1.2 broadly. more city ofthe heritage urban and the areas, buildings, listed conservation Site, our World Westminster Heritage the Parks, Royal including the natural environment, and built Westminster’s and respecting land protecting while of use efficient most make the should It Plan. London the through established growth ofgood principles the with accordance in visitors and workers businesses, for residents, benefits maximise to managed be will growth 1.1 /Westminster’s 5. (see Appendix 1). Appendix (see identified key development sites ofour potential ofthe realisation SPATIAL STRATEGY

30

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Key

Central Activities Zone Waterways Opportunity Areas International Centre 1 A - Paddington Major Centre B - Victoria District Centre C - Tottenham Court Road 1 (Westminster portion) C Strategic Cultural Areas: C1 - Millbank North West Economic R1 Development Area C2 - Knightsbridge R2 Housing Renewal Areas C3 - West End A E 1 - Church Street / World Heritage Site TH LIN CR1 ABE C Edgware Road ELIZ R Major Rail Stations CR3 C3 2 - Ebury Bridge Estate CR2 (4 Terminal) Area (Hectares) 2 West End Retail R1 L - Marylebone I R3 and Leisure 2,147 A 3 2 R Special Policy Area R2 - Paddington S S R3 - Charing Cross 4 O Royal Parks R R4 - Victoria C 5 - Regent's Park D 1 West End SE O 2 - Hyde Park CR Elizabeth Line Stations Partnership C2 P O CR1 - Paddington R 3 - Kensington Gardens P R4 CR2 - Bond Street 4 - Green Park B CR3 - Tottenham 5 - St. James's Park Court Road C1 Neighbours 2 Brent

Camden Kensington City of London & Chelsea London Central Lambeth Activity Zone Wandsworth

Figure 7. Key Diagram

31 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

1.4 / Developers will be encouraged to work together Employment Uses of international and/or to bring forward coordinated proposals, including national importance 1.7 / Employment activity in Westminster is highly combining adjacent sites into larger development diverse, and of vital importance to the wider UK 1.10 / Central to London’s world-class capital city opportunities. This approach is likely to offer greater economy. To secure the right conditions for status, Westminster is home to a variety of uses potential to increase the scale and mass of buildings continued economic growth, the past trend of and buildings that are of international and national through exemplary design. It will encourage the most losing business space must be halted, and the importance, and positively contribute to its unique efficient use of scarce land, helping to create places growth of a range of spaces that meets the needs appeal. This includes buildings and uses that host that are better integrated with the surrounding built of modern businesses supported. the functions of government and the state, centres environment and that work effectively for existing of excellence for higher education, research and communities and future occupants. The Central Activities Zone (CAZ) medicine, world-famous arts and cultural institutions and other prestigious institutions, an international Housing 1.8 / The CAZ is designated through the London sporting venue (Lord’s Cricket Ground), and major Plan, and includes more land in Westminster than 1.5 / Like the rest of London, demand for new tourist attractions. Many of the buildings that host any other London borough. It provides a rich mix of housing across all tenures in Westminster is these uses contribute to Westminster’s heritage, commercial uses that contribute to central London’s very high. We have therefore set an ambitious and are vitally important to London and the UK’s wide appeal but is also home to a substantial housing target that exceeds the London Plan target tourist industry. residential population. As the heart of a world city, in the first ten years of the Plan to deliver levels of Westminster’s portion of the CAZ includes the housing consistent with the government’s standard 1.11 / A Restoration and Renewal Programme is functions of monarchy and government, a variety methodology for calculating housing need. The underway to protect and enhance the outstanding of cultural, educational, professional and religious affordable housing target will ensure that delivery universal value of the Palace of Westminster. Over institutions, world-class retail, headquarters of meets identified need in the affordable sector, the lifetime of the Plan, to safeguard the country’s national and international businesses, embassies, as well as demand from the market. democracy, development proposals to facilitate the leisure and entertainment. temporary full decant of the House of Lords and 1.6 / The policies in this plan encourage much House of Commons will be necessary, and is 1.9 / The future growth and intensification of the more housing development of the right types, supported in principle. The programme will enable CAZ in a manner that balances its many competing sizes and tenures, to meet the city’s needs. It continuous parliamentary activities whilst functions is supported. This includes the protection includes support for new types of housing rarely refurbishment is undertaken, and secure the historic and intensification of office clusters, and a growth seen in Westminster, embraces innovative designs, legacy of one of the world’s most iconic buildings for and diversification in retail and leisure activity that and is based on an expectation of higher densities future generations. It will ensure that the Palace of respects residential amenity. Additional residential across the city. The Plan also enables the delivery Westminster is a resilient, sustainable and functional development that does not compromise nearby of large housing renewal projects such as at Church building that is more open and accessible, develops businesses’ continued commercial functions can Street / Edgware Road and the Ebury Bridge Estate. heritage skills, and strengthens the World Heritage also positively contribute to the vibrancy and Site’s appeal as a visitor destination. diversity of the area.

32 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Specialist clusters of uses Westminster Abbey World Heritage Site, over 11,000 lifetime of the Plan will help achieve a more listed buildings and structures, and conservation pleasant walkable environment and better air 1.12 / Within some parts of Westminster, clusters of areas covering approximately 78% of the city. These quality - to the benefit of residents, workers and specialist uses exist that have a distinct character, assets positively contribute to the city’s wide appeal visitors. A shift towards more sustainable travel make a major contribution to London’s global to visitors, businesses, and residents. New patterns that makes the most of central London’s appeal, and merit policy protection. These include: development will therefore need to respond extensive public transport network will also be –– Soho Special Policy Area: small scale mixed use positively to this context through high quality design necessary to make efficient use of scarce land including specialist retail, creative industries, and architecture as the city continues to evolve. and accommodate the levels of commercial and cultural and entertainment uses. Heritage assets should be seen as an asset that residential growth the city needs. positively shapes new developments and contributes –– Harley Street Special Policy Area: medical uses. to a sense of place, rather than a constraint. 1.17 / The River Thames is a strategic waterway at the –– Mayfair and St James’s Special Policy Area: heart of London’s origin. It reflects the city’s history art galleries and luxury / niche retail. Natural environment, public realm, and its worldwide position. The river is also one of the and North Bank riverfront city’s largest spaces and has itself become a tourist –– Savile Row Special Policy Area: bespoke tailoring. attraction. The North Bank is home to some of 1.16 / The quality of the public realm and green Westminster’s more distinctive buildings and 1.13 / The West End, Millbank and Knightsbridge infrastructure network are vitally important to the institutions and is also an incomparable platform from Strategic Cultural Areas also provide important continued growth and success of Westminster, as where other London landmarks can be observed. It clusters of uses. Within these areas cultural uses are acknowledged through a number of council therefore provides a significant opportunity to create afforded protection to retain the character and strategies1. It includes the city’s streets, the Royal a new destination that reconnects the buzz of the city function of the area. Parks, canals and waterways, and London with its water boundary, where people meet, relax Squares. Together these provide opportunities for and play while activating public life and contributing Town centres and high streets rest and relaxation, the setting to the city’s iconic to the city’s success. Improvements to the public architecture, enable the safe movement of people, 1.14 / The evolution of town centres and high streets realm, alongside uses that promote the cultural and and help address climate change. High quality will be supported to ensure they can respond to the commercial character of the area and help activate streets, parks and spaces can and should challenges posed by online retailing and to make the riverfront are therefore supported in principle encourage, facilitate and enable physical activity certain that they remain vibrant hubs of commercial - to help realise this ambition. by default and well-designed spaces should be activity which meet the needs of local flexible and support a range of physical activity, neighbourhoods, workers and visitors. Infrastructure leisure and sport. Enhancing these areas over the 1.18 / New development will be supported by Heritage and townscape investment in supporting infrastructure. This will 1 Including the ActiveWestminster Strategy 2018-2022, A 1.15 / Westminster’s heritage and townscape value Partnership Approach to Open Spaces and Biodiversity in include physical infrastructure such as the reflects its rich history and importance as a leading Westminster (2019), the Westminster Walking Strategy transport network, and social and community uses world city. It includes the Palace of Westminster and 2017-2027, and the Westminster Cycling Strategy (2014) that help support good growth. We will combine

33 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY and other public funding streams such as grants, grants, as such streams funding public other and council resources with planning obligations, 106 Section and Levy Infrastructure Community the secured through developer contributions, set out in this plan. this in out set objectives of the delivery to maximise order in C. B. A. priorities: following over deliver the Plan will the period (WERLSPA) Area Policy Leisure Special and Retail End the West of intensification The Area Opportunity Tottenham Road Court Leisure Special Policy Area and and Retail End West Priorities: Development Spatial 2. the Oxford Street District. District. Street Oxford the of transformation the including sector, the in change and to innovation responds that experience leisure and retail improved An areathe the in identified London Plan. for targets ofgrowth realisation The retail, leisure, officesand hotel use. developmentcommercial-led including range a through growth jobs Significant

(GVA) than the City ofLondon. City the (GVA) than economy – generating more gross value added UK to the vital is End West the in place takes that activity ofcommercial nature The UK. the in of jobs concentrations anywhere diverse and most provides one It around of largest world. the the from visitors internationalthe attracting stage, on for London ashowcase is End 2.1 West /The 2 of London’s top centre town the at sit Knightsbridge alongside (which Street, Bond Street, Regent Street, Oxford to home is It centre. office aglobal as role iconic alongside shopping its and leisure districts, /The area contains2.2 some of London’s most F. E. D. G. West End Good Growth, Arup, 2018 Arup, Growth, Good End West

and delivery demands. and delivery area’smanaging the servicing, freight, to approach co-ordinated A more and enhanced offer. cultural evening economyA diverse and night-time infrastructure. transport ofpublic network and Bank), North the along (including realm public environment, enhancedAn pedestrian and heritage assets. and heritage central London’s and iconic distinct places of character unique ofthe Protection 2

diverse and varied than simply retail. retail. simply than varied and diverse interdependence of is uses that much more nature area, of wider the andmixed-use the reflect to better expanded been now has This Centre,International Soho, and Covent Garden. End West ofthe area asmaller covered which Area, Policy Special Retail End West the as designated was area the /Historically 2.4 environment. of built the quality wider the (SPAs),and Areas Policy Special as identified been have that uses ofspecific clusters with areas of and function character the includes protecting This recognisable assets. places and heritage and distinct ofLondon’s ofsome most character the enhances and respects that away in managed be must it welcomed, is development new While 3 London. ofcentral reach 45 minutes within people million 1.5 further aprojected brings Line Elizabeth ofthe introduction the as to set increase is This across area. the already result in intense activity and workplaces /The current of mix attractions 2.3 setting. to aunique contribute positively assets, and of heritage buildings concentration listed a high with environment, of built the The quality Trafalgar of River Thames. the Square, and parts spaces such Circus, Leicester as Piccadilly Square, and public recognised attractions tourist most and Theatreland. also It contains some of London’s including Coventleisure Soho, Garden, destinations retail and hierarchy), world-renowned and other www.crossrail.co.uk/news/crossrail-in-numbers SPATIAL STRATEGY

34 3

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Figure 8: WERLSPA and Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area

35 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area Commercial-led development –– Enhances the West End’s position as a globally competitive retail destination; 2.5 / The area around Tottenham Court Road 2.6 / Identified growth within the WERLSPA will be station, which includes land both in Westminster commercially led and will require the delivery of –– Secures a diverse range of office space that and Camden, has been identified as an Opportunity additional floorspace alongside the intensification supports increased employment opportunities Area in the London Plan. This is in recognition of the of existing space. Growth will be achieved through in growth sectors and takes full advantage of significant capacity for high quality new new developments with increased scale and the opportunities the Elizabeth Line (and development that delivers new jobs and homes and massing that respect local context, including within Crossrail 2) bring; an enhanced public realm, alongside transport Tottenham Court Road Opportunity Area, along –– Protects and supports the arts, culture and improvements associated with the Elizabeth Line. Oxford Street, and the area’s key thoroughfares. entertainment offer for residents, workers, The London Plan sets out indicative growth targets Replacement buildings will be focused in areas of and visitors; of 6,000 additional jobs and 300 new homes over lower townscape value, whilst in areas of higher the period 2016-2041 for the entire Tottenham Court townscape value, sensitive refurbishment and –– Supports the visitor economy, including through Road Opportunity Area – including land in both extension of existing buildings can also support the upgrading of hotel stock; Westminster and Camden. As one of London’s growth. The majority of commercial growth is –– Diversifies the food and beverage offer to more mature Opportunity Areas, and given the anticipated to come through windfall development, complement the retail environment; and progress already made on upgrading the station as has historically been the case in Westminster. environs, a substantial contribution towards these –– Minimises negative impacts on residential growth targets has already been made. At least Good growth neighbourhoods. 50% of the overall London Plan target will be 2.7 / The WERLSPA is anticipated to absorb achieved within Westminster (including what has Oxford Street much of Westminster’s future commercial growth been permitted or built since 2016). Over the Plan – reflecting its unique status, size, and wide 2.8 / Growth in retail and leisure floorspace will period, we will continue to facilitate the further appeal. Scenario testing for the West End4 has ensure the West End responds to change in the intensification of this area in accordance with the projected potential for an uplift of 124,000 jobs sector and its status and reputation is enhanced. principles of good growth - including through the across the entire West End (including parts of This will include the transformation of Oxford Street to delivery of the key development sites set out in London Borough of Camden) to the period 2041, ensure a more diverse and interesting mix of uses and Appendix 1, and the development of Crossrail 2 through a range of commercial development better quality public realm that prioritises pedestrians, safeguarded sites either alongside or after including retail, food and drink uses, hotels, arts, enhances the shopper experience, and makes it a necessary infrastructure works. Delivery of our culture and entertainment and offices. Investment more attractive place to visit and enjoy. Along with an contribution towards the indicative targets set out in in all of these sectors will be necessary to improved public realm, the built form of Oxford Street the London Plan will be documented through future achieve good growth that: offers scope for increased height to deliver a range Authority Monitoring Reports. of commercial floorspace that complements the retail offer and provides modern workspace - reinforcing its role as a key commercial centre. 4 West End Good Growth, Arup, 2018

36 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Evening and night-time Freight and servicing economy and cultural offer 2.11 / The nature and intensity of activity in the West 3. Spatial Development Priorities: 2.9 / The West End is home to the largest End generates significant freight and servicing Paddington Opportunity Area evening and night-time economy in the UK. requirements. This causes congestion and pollution, Development in the Paddington Opportunity It has a wealth of cultural uses, pubs, bars, and makes the area less attractive to walk and cycle. Area over the Plan period will deliver the restaurants, nightclubs, cinemas, theatres and We will work with landowners and businesses to following priorities: other leisure uses. To ensure the area is support the better coordination of freight and servicing welcoming and attractive to all communities, in order to minimise unnecessary vehicular trips. This A. The achievement of growth targets for the the appropriate management and further will be done alongside interventions that secure a area identified in the London Plan. diversification of the evening and night-time more pleasant environment that incentivises walking, economy will be supported. This will be done cycling and use of public transport. This will include B. New workspace through an expanded range through enhancements to its cultural offer, investment in the public realm to help green the area of offices, light industrial units and workshops hosting of events and art installations such as part of the Wild West End programme,5 improved with particular support for flexible workspaces. as Lumiere London, and late-night shopping. wayfinding, and investment in public transport interchanges by TfL and Network Rail. As set out in the C. Inclusive and high-quality public realm 2.10 / This activity will help ensure the evening spatial strategy, investment in the public realm along that enhances sense of place and and night-time economy is not dominated by the the North Bank is also a key priority for the area. encourages dwelling. consumption of alcohol, which can lead to issues of anti-social behaviour and deter those who do Partnership working D. Enhanced sustainable travel modes not drink from visiting central London outside of through improvements to transport 2.12 / The rich mix of historic buildings, uses the daytime. Enhancing the cultural offer will interchanges and the pedestrian and and level of activity in the West End results in a include support for new venues, ancillary uses cyclist environment, including public complex number of issues and challenges which that enable existing ones to thrive (e.g. cafés access to the canal waterfront. cannot be met through land-use planning alone. within museums or theatres), and investment in We will therefore continue to work within the the public realm around existing clusters such E. Reduced severance from surrounding areas West End Partnership6 and with other stakeholders as that proposed at the Strand / Aldwych. including Church Street, Edgware Road to achieve the shared objectives of enhancing station, the North West Economic and maintaining its global reputation, improving Development Area (NWEDA) and Praed Street the retail and leisure offer and pedestrian town centre. environment, and make visiting the area a more pleasurable experience. F. Enhanced job opportunities and facilities for the residents of the neighbouring areas 5 www.wildwestend.london of Church Street and the NWEDA. 6 See www.westendpartnership.london

37 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY between different transport nodes. differenttransport between volumesand ensure of traffic integration a seamless adapted to accommodatesensitively higher the that Paddington Stationis continues important to be it capacity, network transport expanded and growth arising from residential and commercialpassengers of numbers increased With Area. Opportunity Oak and Old Royal Park including the city the of west to the areas to growth and Airport Heathrow to expanding the provides connection station near in future. the The station the coming to serve new the Elizabethunderground with line lines, also and four London of country west the the to London link that services ofrailway a number has It London. central into points key arrival ofthe one is tocontributing London’s station the distinctiveness, building Ilisted AGrade node. transport is major Westminster’s Station /Paddington 3.2 Paddington Station area. for the ambitions shared our to deliver for Paddington Plan aPlace develop to stakeholders local with in partnership working We tocommunities. our continue will commitment emerging and existing together bring help can and to all accessible and welcoming is that destination and place asuccessful as to develop continues area the to We ensure line. want Elizabeth ofthe arrival the with node transport Station Paddington the of the expansion and sites brownfield under-utilised to presence thanks the regeneration of large-scale for opportunities significant most city’s ofthe one area the already in happened Paddington, remains has growth of amount asignificant 3.1 /While this area to achieve significant office gains in the in gains office significant to area achieve this enabled has CAZ the within location Paddington’s links, excellent to its addition In area. the in growth region wider and and the enable further Paddington’s of London to connection other parts increase help will area to the line Elizabeth of the The housing. arrival public spaces and high-quality a focus maintaining on liveable while density higher at for building opportunities provide area the in connections /The excellent3.5 public transport 1. Appendix in out set sites development of remaining key delivery the through including this areaof intensification further the facilitate to continue we will period, Plan the Over Area. Opportunity Paddington for the 2016-2041 period the over homes new 1,000 and jobs additional 13,000 least ofat targets growth indicative out sets development area in this and high-density further /The London3.4 Planfor hascapacity identified growth jobs and Homes mobility. active including oftravel, modes sustainable encourage help and growth enable will turn in which navigated, ensure area the is accessible and be easily can key is to This neighbourhood. ofits success the and hub transport ofthe operations the Square) require will differentto enable solutions and Paddington Crossrail (including station area in the aroundredevelopment the projects major and works improvement ofstation phases toroutes different in are connection expected and flows pedestrian in changes /Significant 3.3

uses. Twouses. key other development sites remain ofcommercial amix and provision transport for expanded capacity with area the within site is /Paddington a key station 3.8 development Key development sites also bewill supported. a of mix uses commercial other and community area’s the strengthening offeras destination, a and to neighbourhood an inclusive, sustainable To ensure development to contributes making location. office an just not is 3.7 /Paddington and to vacancy. prevent long-term start-ups proposals from small and businesses and support to encourage locations in these are also supported uses Meanwhile Studios nearby in NWEDA. the Western Great at seen is as such Westway the and under locations on canal-side units, industrial to accommodate and light workshops opportunities floorplates toflexible space. There are particular Area from large workspace across Opportunity the of types for all proposals /We3.6 welcome to through Edgware Road. boundary Area Opportunity the beyond growth commercial for further as a catalyst and act job opportunities more create patterns, work flexible and styles in trends office evolving andbusiness align with of This encourage will workspaces. new types of range the for widening and provision office spaces, there is but scope for further – home of to larger Westminster’s most office Victoria with –together now is It decades. two last SPATIAL STRATEGY

38

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Figure 9: Paddington Opportunity Area

39 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY along the course of the canal. An improved An of course canal. along the the public ofPaddington west north to the areas other with links canal side also environment will strengthen improved An hub. transport public Paddington to the connection and last-mile as an alternative for encourage andthat walking cycling pleasure improve waterside places these into ways further providing a sense of place. There are opportunities area to the assets strong are already Basin Paddington and the Union Canal 3.10 /The Grand and publicConnections realm including public access to canal. the enhance public realm the and create permeability, design can that proposals of high-quality support We area. will ofthe priorities the to deliver change for opportunity aThe site significant presents CAZ. ofthe function strategic the supports which use industrial byan occupied is Basin Paddington ofthe north to the site Travis /The 3.9 Perkins supported. arealso Street Praed on offer retail of the to appearanceImprovements and quality the Area. of Opportunity to the south the permeability enhanced public realm, and improve and links of place and encourage dwelling an through sense residential and commercial strengthen uses, on site, facilities significant alongside health improved to re-provide an opportunity presents value. The site heritage and enhance its preserve to helping while area the in for change catalyst site has potential for redevelopment to act as a a as to act for redevelopment potential has site the care services, health important extremely provides Hospital Mary’s area.in St. the While

Road, the NWEDA and Praed Street. Praed and NWEDA the Road, areasneighbouring of Church Edgware Street, the with links severance and strengthen should aimarea. to Developments minimise movement the and cycle throughout pedestrian support that and improvements townscape to space routes, public create intuitive legibility and toshould contribute improving permeability developments Area Opportunity 3.11 the /Across and enjoy area. the accessible, welcoming spaces for to people rest provide and station the using ofpedestrians volume realm the linked help will ease congestion with C. B. A. priorities: following the deliver will period Plan the over Area Opportunity Victoria the in Development Area Opportunity Victoria Priorities: Development Spatial 4. transport modes. transport public between integration Improved facilities. community and enhancedAdditional social and areathe in identified London Plan. for the targets ofgrowth achievement The

the public realmthe to area enable the and to thrive and accessibility toimprovements public transport, alongside Area Opportunity this in growth Weresidential population. want to encourage to agrowing home and leisure, and oftourism place for and businesses hotspot government functions, hub, transport abusy as position unique its given 4.1 faces unique pressures /Victoria and challenges I. H. G. F. E. D.

World Site. Heritage Westminster’s particularly assets, heritage The safeguarding and enhancement of visitor attractions. Enhanced between routes and connections 2. for Crossrail of sites safeguarding The Station. Coach ofVictoria relocation for the Support cyclists. and pedestrians for and permeability, particularly area’s the strengthen capacity, legibility to quality environmental and local to improvements through public realm the travel modesEnhanced sustainable encourages dwelling. enhancesthat sense of place and public realm andInclusive high-quality SPATIAL STRATEGY

40

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Figure 10: Victoria Opportunity Area

41 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

grow its reputation as an attractive destination. We sites in this area including active frontages at in the country both in terms of public transport and will continue our commitment to working with local ground floor level is encouraged unless this would the road network. Movement is therefore one of stakeholders to develop a Place Plan for Victoria to compromise movement in and around the Victoria the area’s main activities and a defining feature of deliver our shared ambitions for the area. Transport Interchange, or access and operational the south western extent of the Opportunity Area. requirements for existing activities. The Victoria Transport Interchange comprises Home and jobs growth underground and a mainline railway station Social and community uses and open spaces providing direct links with Gatwick Airport and 4.2 / The well-connected nature of the area means connecting central London with the wider south that it has the potential to accommodate higher 4.5 / With local population numbers expected to east, and a busy bus terminus and coach station. residential and office density, particularly where it rise through densification of the housing stock, contributes to achieving the other objectives of the it is essential that housing delivery is supported 4.8 / Victoria is undeniably a congested area. Opportunity Area. Parts of the Victoria Opportunity by adequate provision of social and community Currently there is insufficient capacity to Area fall between conservation areas, providing facilities including libraries, facilities for children and accommodate pedestrians using the interchange greater scope for change. young people, and sports and leisure facilities. This which can result in conflicts between pedestrians will be achieved through new facilities as well as and vehicular traffic. Existing developments 4.3 / The London Plan sets out indicative growth improvements to and re-provision of existing stock. sometimes contribute to this issue, presenting targets of at least 4,000 additional jobs and 1,000 physical obstacles to movement. The dominance new homes over the period 2016-2041 for the Townscape and heritage assets of roads over pedestrian desire lines force people Victoria Opportunity Area and identifies Victoria 4.6 / The area contains a significant number of to undertake confusing and counter-intuitive Station and its environs, including the airspace larger and taller buildings which are primarily journeys. The area also lacks a coherent sense above its tracks and approaches, to have significant located along the key routes of Buckingham of place and of urban quality. Visual clutter and potential for mixed-use intensification. Over the Palace Road, Vauxhall Bridge Road and Victoria the absence of key landmarks add to this. Plan period, we will continue to facilitate the further Street. Victoria is also home to a significant intensification of the Opportunity Area according to number of heritage assets, including the Grade II 4.9 / The Department for Transport has made a the principles of sustainable development, Listed station, Grade I listed Westminster safeguarding direction for Crossrail 2 and we will including through the delivery of key development Cathedral and is in close proximity to the Royal support the project in safeguarding sites. Should sites with potential for mixed-use intensification as Parks, the Thames and the Westminster World this project be realised it will result in an even set out in Appendix 1, and the development of Heritage Site. Development in the Opportunity busier transport interchange and provide a further Crossrail 2 safeguarded sites either alongside or Area will need to be sensitive to these assets catalyst for change. Crossrail 2 presents an after necessary infrastructure works. and their settings, and contribute to their opportunity to re-imagine the station and the enhancement where possible. surrounding area to deliver a modern transport 4.4 / Victoria Street is dominated by commercial interchange that can support increased future activity at ground floor, with office entrances, The Victoria Transport Interchange operation, improve access to transport, movement shops, restaurants and theatres adding to the in the area and enhance the public realm. As part vitality of this area. A mix of uses on development 4.7 / Victoria is one of the best-connected areas

42 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

of this and because the coach station operations 4.12 / The railway tracks and the busy Buckingham have grown beyond the capacity of the building Palace Road are barriers, hindering pedestrian and its location, we support the potential future movement east to west and vice-versa, particularly 5. Spatial Development relocation of the coach station, which is among the for the residential areas of Pimlico and Belgravia. Priorities: North West Economic safeguarded sites for Crossrail 2. This may be to Improved connectivity throughout the area could outside of Westminster. be achieved by strengthening the area’s links with Development Area neighbouring sites and visitor attractions, including Regeneration of the North West Economic Key development sites Parliament Square and the World Heritage Site Development Area (NWEDA) over the Plan and other significant heritage assets such as the period will deliver the following priorities: 4.10 / A number of key development sites exist Royal Parks and the Thames. within the Victoria Station environs, which A. Increased job opportunities, represent a key opportunity to achieve our targets particularly for local residents. This 4.13 / Traffic domination and poor air quality for the area, while ensuring a coordinated will include the protection of existing are key challenges that need to be addressed in approach to development is taken to integrate employment floorspace, and the provision order to improve the quality of public space and sites together and deliver successful places of additional employment and commercial enable active travel and easier movement designed around people. This will support the floorspace, in particular that which is throughout the area. We welcome interventions creation of a network of high quality and suitable for small and medium enterprises that can help improve the pedestrian and cyclist welcoming places, which will contribute to (SMEs) and / or helps diversify the environment and priority on Victoria Street and a stronger identity for the area. local economy. Parliament Square, as well as enhanced connections between the two areas. Improving public space and connections B. New residential and mixed-use developments that improve housing 4.11 / Developing the potential of Victoria and 4.14 / Provision of green infrastructure as quality and help diversify the area’s particularly its role as an integrated transport hub is well as permanent and temporary landscaping tenure mix. largely dependent on managing the high levels of interventions (e.g. on cleared sites awaiting pedestrian and vehicular traffic to ease movement redevelopment) can help soften the streetscape C. A greener and more walkable environment in and around the area. This will be achieved by and contribute to improved air and environmental that addresses issues of severance caused sensibly improving the public realm to make it quality and enhanced sense of place. Christchurch by the railway, canal, Harrow Road and the easy to navigate through enhanced wayfinding. Gardens represents one such opportunity to Westway, and creates opportunities for the Improved and new public spaces should be improve existing green space, and provide a extension of, and greater use of, the Grand inclusive, pleasant, and safe to encourage quieter space away from the buzz of the main Union Canal towpath. residents, visitors and commuters to enjoy and relax street where workers, residents and visitors can in the area. Active frontages can also contribute to rest and interact. Improvements to the character, interest and visual entertainment which can appearance and safety of Westminster Cathedral support a sense of place and aid legibility. Piazza will also be encouraged.

43 CONTENTS businesses and offers opportunities for andopportunities businesses offers of variety to a home is area Road Woodfield The also contains some It commercialhousing. areas. affordable rented ofsocial proportion ahigh with residential, primarily is NWEDA ofthe /Much 5.2 growth Commercial expected in both areas. development of nature different the – to reflect Area Opportunity to Paddington exclude Plan City adopted previous the from amended been has area of of Westminster. the The boundary parts central more in development by offered opportunities fromthe benefit also ensuring residents but itself, area the within opportunities improved for providing include will plan this through Efforts levels of to persistent inequality. tackle intervention coordinated requiring area an is It city. the higher elsewhere levels than in of worklessness, and and health, earnings levels of qualifications, lower areas, with deprived most Westminster’s of some contained long has 5.1 NWEDA /The CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY E. D.

the needs of the local community. local ofthe needs the meets that infrastructure community and social improved and ofnew provision The environment. physical and a more attractive ofactivity range agreater to provide Centre toEnhancements Harrow Road District underutilised asset that offers opportunities opportunities offers asset that underutilised The canal is aUnion Canal. significant Grand along the to increase activity opportunity /Development area in the 5.4 an represents Homes Gardens. atprovided Walterdon and Elgin Community being that as such possible, wherever spaces open accessible publicly new byproviding area, the New development should therefore seek to green beyond. and area the within spaces open to existing Westway, access limit and all lines, railway currently space. A40 Severance Union Canal, Grand from the open accessible publicly in deficient is area /The 5.3 connectivity and space Open opportunities. employment and provide and viability vitality long-term its sustain help can uses centre for town Centre District Road Harrow in development commercial New proposals. ofredevelopment advance in ofspace use meanwhile will as welcomed, be will Arts, Paddington at as such use, for community spaces provide that opportunities Multi-purpose potential offers enterprise space. foradditional also elsewhere. Westway A40 Land under the theofferemployment from boat officesdistinct – and canal space studios including workshops, business grow-on and start-up, creative, offer for local to the grow scope is nearby, there Studios Western ofGreat success the on Building homes. high-quality additional alongside opportunities job new deliver can that intensification

Retail Plan. Place Road Harrow the in explored be further will These opportunities of NWEDA. the priorities use land the delivering as well as NWEDA the beyond and within both connections better and provide to permeability improve pedestrian over help Plan will the period others among Garage Bus Park at and Westbourne Way /Elmfield Road Harrow ofkey at sites development The above. and to issues of address the severance identified NWEDA ofthe part this in environment pedestrian to improve the area an represents opportunity /Redevelopment5.5 in Woodfield the Road Quietway. Drayton West to Paddington the Trust to facilitate & Rivers Canal the and TfL with work We will transport. and use of cycling publicencourage walking, help that interventions to fund Programme being made to TfL’s Neighbourhoods Liveable space open at are Bids Regent’s Park. quality to high and Common, Oak Old and Paddington nearby in opportunities to job –both environment cycling and walking attractive an to provide to the challenges traditional high streets face. streets high traditional challenges to the adapts it that also but Market, Hill Maida alongside needs for residents’ local shopping and servicing to provide continues this that important is It area. the within uses centre town other and ofshops cluster main the provides Centre District Road /Harrow 5.6 SPATIAL STRATEGY

44

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Figure 11: North West Economic Development Area

45 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY and leisure facilities necessary to support growth. to support and leisure necessary facilities health improved in the investment education, by supported be therefore will Development for to them mix. and provide opportunities communities, oflocal needs the meet growth, sustainable to support important be will area the in infrastructure community and social /New 5.8 infrastructure community and Social Plan. Place Road Harrow aforthcoming in out set be Proposalsand for road centre underpasses. the will include additional or more canal inviting crossings catchment This could area also be will sought. a wider so moreCentre it serves conveniently to reduce severance to District Opportunities the and cyclists. environment for pedestrians asafer, welcoming more bysecuring centre help will enhanceimprove the junction Hill Maida to of centre. the Recent investments periphery the on supported ofuses mix diverse amore with Market, Hill to Maida close remain will centre the core of retail the that envisaged is it sustainability, appearance. physical To its long-term secure its to improve realm public the in investment alongside meanwhile uses) therefore will be supported, (including frontages for active small with businesses evening economy, and night-time hotels, and spaces ofthe growth the including centre, the within diversity Greater shops. betting and takeaways food hot as such uses and retail low-quality of some presence and the shoprealm, fronts, lack of active public quality poor 2018 Check identified Health Centre the Town Westminster of findings 5.7 /The

E. D. C. B. A. priorities: following the deliver will period Road Renewal Housing Area over Plan the /Edgware Street Church ofthe Redevelopment HOUSING RENEWAL AREA ROAD /EDGWARE STREET CHURCH Renewal Areas Housing Estate Bridge and Ebury Church Street /Edgware Road Priorities: Development Spatial 6.

green route or ‘green or spine’. route green including a north-south improvements, realm public and infrastructure green New Masterplan. Street Church the with accordance in improvements to support active travel. active to support improvements infrastructure through Improved mobility hub. and well-being health including a new facilities, Community community. local the to CAZ in the opportunities employment further linking and jobs new 350 least At homes, new quality high 2,000 least At

K. J. I. H. priorities: following the deliver will estate Bridge Ebury ofthe renewal The RENEWAL AREA EBURY BRIDGE ESTATE HOUSING G. F.

facilities for Church Street Market. Street for Church facilities improved including Centre, District Road toEnhancements Church Street / Edgware buildings. tall including land, use of efficient most the ensure design to and high-quality Innovative accommodation and community facilities. accommodation and community retail ofnew form the in Centre Local Bridge to Ebury Improvements the land. use of efficient most the ensure design to and high-quality Innovative infrastructure. improvedthrough public realm and green to area wider the Enhanced connections homes. 750 newApproximately high-quality SPATIAL STRATEGY

46

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Figure 12: Church Street/Edgware Road Housing Renewal Area

47 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Renewal Area over the next 15-20 years. Sites Sites years. 15-20 next the over Area Renewal Housing Road /Edgware Street Church the in delivered be will homes new 2,000 least /At 6.2 material for consideration any planning applications. a is and area the in for development a framework The ChurchPlan creates period. Street Masterplan City the over delivered be will which masterplan, to produce an community ambitious local the with We closely worked have for us. priority akey is Area Renewal Housing Road Edgware / Street Church ofthe 6.1 redevelopment /The RenewalHousing Area Road /Edgware Street Church using planning powers where appropriate. where powers planning using secured and explored be will and for us priority a is Road /Edgware Street Church in community to local the CAZ, in the in Westminster, particularly job growth to link further realised. Opportunities fully yet been not has for workspace destination create anew and businesses to have attract links potential and these the Station, and Marylebone Station Road Edgware at hubs oftransport reach easy within is area The phase. construction the during jobs 3,500 around supporting as well as area, local the in jobs new 350 least create at will Road /Edgware Street ofChurch regeneration the homes, ofnew delivery the /Alongside 6.3 needs. local meet that homes quality of deliver higherwherehigh will buildings these development design, including the high-quality densification, incorporating innovative and through land use of make efficient will area the in

to wayfinding and streetscape along Marylebone Marylebone along streetscape and to wayfinding Improvements Road. Edgware and Grove Lisson to link developments realm public in prioritised be Walking Westminster the Strategy. will Pedestrians of objectives ofthe implementation the through to improve connectivity opportunities maximising area’s ofthe potential, most to make the /Development be6.6 encouraged proposals will zones. calming traffic of20mph introduction the travel across area, the including and active mobility improve will comfort, and safety connectivity, and to andwalking cycling enhance accessibility, to improvements and environmental increase accessible space open area. in the Public realm publicly in to 40% ofup increase an envisages Masterplan Street Church The space. to open access and mobility both to improve opportunity route across area the an represents north-south ofa‘green spine’ introduction the and realm public of The redesign deficiency. space ofopen area an within lies Road /Edgware Street /Church 6.5 connectivity and space Open are brought to housing renewal this area. development their and ensure benefits co-ordinate to 1) Appendix (see site akeyas development designated been havetherefore They CAZ. of the rest the and Area Opportunity Paddington the Area, Renewal Housing Road /Edgware Street Church the between connectivity to enable further opportunity House,together represent a redevelopment Griffith and House adjacent the site, Capital together with station Line &District Circle Road Edgware /The 6.4

potential to create a significant uplift in the in uplift to create asignificant potential the has site The Strategy. Renewal Housing our in opportunity astrategic as highlighted was Estate Bridge Ebury 2010 In homes. existing 336 and blocks 13 comprises It west. the to Road Bridge Ebury and east to the line railway bythe bounded Thames, the and Station Victoria between situated is Estate Bridge Ebury /The 6.8 Area Renewal Housing Estate Bridge Ebury Theatre. adjacent and the these Cockpit centred around a new quarter envisages cultural masterplan The identity. Street’s of Church feature important are an and employment of local source markets are antiques an important existing The facilities. public realm, and storage parking quality higher layout, anew including Market, Street for Church facilities improved be also will Thereto for residents. broaden local possibilities initiatives and other support business training, for skills, centre also will provide opportunities The hub. well-being and health anew including providing access to facilities, retail and community community, local for the hub important an to be continue will This Centre. District Road Edgware / Street Church the to enhance opportunity an 6.7 /The redevelopment of area the also presents Retail connectivity. to in improvements east-west Regent’s also canal contribute will Park towpath areathe to and Enhancements Regent’s the Park. between connections Road help will to strengthen SPATIAL STRATEGY

48

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

Figure 13: Ebury Bridge Estate Housing Renewal Area

49 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS CONTENTS

number of homes, contributing to meeting 7.1 / Westminster is already densely developed. strategic housing need, but it will also deliver 7. Managing development for As the city grows, detrimental impacts on wider benefits for the community, made possible existing users of the area must be avoided. by the large-scale nature of the estate renewal. Westminster’s people It is imperative that design solutions are found Development will be neighbourly by: to avoid negative impacts associated with further 6.9 / The renewal of the estate over the Plan growth. By adopting the principle of neighbourly A. Protecting and where appropriate enhancing period represents an opportunity to improve development, we expect development to make a amenity, by preventing unacceptable impacts quality of life for existing residents by upgrading positive contribution to the quality and function of in terms of daylight and sunlight, sense of the ageing housing stock, addressing the local area. We will take a balanced approach enclosure, overshadowing, privacy and overcrowding and providing improved public that considers the specific location and context as overlooking. realm, which will deliver walking links to the well as the merits of each proposal including the surrounding areas including Victoria Opportunity wider benefits a scheme can deliver, against B. Protecting and where appropriate Area, the nearby Chelsea Barracks site and impacts on the surrounding area. enhancing local environmental quality. Belgravia. The long-term regeneration of the estate will allow for the phasing of new buildings, 7.2 / The principles of neighbourly development C. Protecting and positively responding and the introduction of meanwhile uses on-site, contained in this policy apply to all applications. to local character and the historic ensuring the continued presence of community Opportunities to enhance the quality of the local environment. facilities and local convenience retail whilst the area might differ for developments depending on estate is redeveloped. scale and typology, and we may therefore apply D. Not overburdening the capacity of relevant criteria flexibly. We encourage early local infrastructure. engagement with us for advice on the application of this and other policies in the Plan. E. Contributing to the greening of the city. Amenity impacts F. Improving sustainable transport infrastructure and highway conditions. 7.3 / Negative effects on amenity should be minimised as they can impact on quality of life. G. Making appropriate and effective Provision of good indoor daylight and sunlight waste management arrangements. levels is important for health and well-being and to decrease energy consumption through reduced need for artificial heating and lighting. Overshadowing affects the quality or operation of adjacent buildings and can negatively impact on the use of public and private open space for

50 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 SPATIAL STRATEGY CONTENTS

recreation, rest and play. Positioning, scale and places. There are also several areas known for Highways orientation of buildings as well as the incorporation particular functions and uses, attracting visitors 7.8 / The highway is used by pedestrians, cyclists of design measures should be considered to and businesses. The Special Policy Areas in the and motorists, both for movement and for a variety minimise overshadowing and overlooking and economy chapter set out the principles to of other activities. Development should not ensure adequate levels of privacy. Even when protect the uses and character of these areas. obstruct the normal functioning of the highway. there may be no material loss of daylight or sunlight, As far as possible, the pedestrian environment new developments should prevent unacceptable Infrastructure should be enhanced, as well as integrated with increases in the sense of enclosure. 7.6 / A range of facilities, services and other types other transport modes to facilitate active travel. of infrastructure play a vital role for our communities Parking and servicing arrangements require Local environmental quality and the successful operation of the city. When particular attention in a city with competing 7.4 / Polluted air, excessive smells, noise and strong infrastructure capacity is overburdened, this can priorities. The policies in the connections chapter vibrations are examples of environmental impacts create major nuisances to residents, businesses set out our approach to transport management. that have an adverse impact on quality of life and and visitors. Development should, where possible, health and well-being. Development must prevent seek to enhance infrastructure provision. We will Waste management unacceptable environmental impacts on existing work with applicants and infrastructure providers 7.9 / Poor waste management can negatively and new users of building or its neighbours. The to realise this. The Infrastructure Delivery Plan sets affect the quality of the street scene, impact policies in the environment chapter cover these out our approach to the delivery of infrastructure to on health and safety and cause disturbance issues in more detail. We will utilise the Agent of support future growth in the city. for highway users and neighbouring uses. Change principle, which places the burden on Appropriate waste management will be required the applicant to ensure mitigation measures are City greening for new developments in accordance with this plan included to safeguard future local amenity and 7.7 / The Royal Parks and other open spaces and in line with Westminster’s Waste Management ensures development does not cause existing make an important contribution to the quality of Strategy which has a focus on maximising waste nearby uses from having to curtail their activities. Westminster. These spaces also include important reduction, reuse and recycling. biodiversity assets, which are supported by our Character tree population and other green features. 7.5 / Westminster consists of many distinct Additional growth in the city will put these spaces and high-quality neighbourhoods, including under increased pressure. Development must townscapes, buildings and spaces that contribute therefore protect and enhance the green to our heritage. The built and natural environment infrastructure in the city. This includes seeking of Westminster is of exceptional quality and new to achieve wider benefits of greening such as development should seek to celebrate and climate resilience, enhanced amenity and reinforce this. The policies in the design chapter well-being. The environment chapter sets set out our approach to the creation of high-quality out our approach to the greening of the city.

51 CONTENTS we are as acity. Our response needs to be world-class. who about volumes we respond speaks to housing How city. of the prosperity economic the shareto in everyone affordable, allows and inclusive to create that’s need housing immediate an brings This communities. we have country, diverse the in postcodes affluent most of the to some home is Westminster Whilst of design. standards highest very the embodies and available land of the makes most that the Housing towards healthier, contribute will lives. happier that housing affordable have Good, over delivered 20,000 new homes. as rest the of city. the That’s changing. 2040 we By will Historically our housing hasn’t grown at same the rate improvedImproved lives housing, HOUSING

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

8.3 / The National Planning Policy Framework 8. Stepping up housing delivery 2. non-family sized housing is being requires local planning authorities to use a standard reconfigured to create family methodology to calculate the number of homes A. The number of new homes built in sized housing. needed unless exceptional circumstances exist to Westminster will exceed 22,222 over justify using a different methodology. The standard the Plan period. Housing delivery will D. The change of use of any type of housing methodology differs from the SHLAA’s capacity- be ‘stepped up’ over the first 10 years to temporary sleeping accommodation on based approach in that it starts off with a baseline of this plan to deliver 1,495 new homes a permanent basis will not be permitted. housing need based on population projections, each year. This will be achieved by: then adjusts that figure based on an ‘affordability 1. optimising site densities on Key factor’. The resultant figure is then capped at 40% Development Sites, including those above the existing housing target. Using this 8.1 / Achieving Westminster’s housing targets to in Housing Renewal Areas; methodology results in an annual requirement help meet growing and diversifying housing need of 1,495 homes per year for Westminster. 2. delivering a higher number is a key priority of this plan. To do this, it is of homes on small sites; necessary to protect existing housing and fully 8.4 / This City Plan is more pro-growth and optimise the delivery of new provision across the 3. permitting appropriate ambitious than its predecessors. Our policies are city, ensuring land is used most efficiently. This upwards extensions; geared towards encouraging applicants to come means delivering as many new homes as each site forward with more housing, optimising housing 4. planning positively for tall can accommodate, without compromising quality delivery sites and finding new innovative ways to buildings in certain locations. of life for both new and existing neighbouring deliver more homes. We therefore consider we residents. This will require higher density living can deliver above the London Plan target of 1,010 B. No new homes in Westminster will in the majority of cases. per year in the first 10 years of the Plan period, to exceed 200 sq m Gross Internal Area meet the housing need figure derived from the (GIA), except where it is necessary Housing Target standard methodology. Through this approach, to protect a heritage asset. 8.2 / The London Plan sets all London boroughs we expect to exceed the London Plan derived an annual housing target based on the GLA’s target of 22,222 homes across the Plan period. EXISTING HOUSING estimate of land capacity through the Strategic Setting a higher housing target in the first 10 C. All existing residential uses, floorspace Housing Land Availability Assessment (SHLAA). years of this plan is part of our pro-growth and and land will be protected, except where: The target allocated to Westminster in the Draft ambitious narrative and sets a strong foundation London Plan is 1,010 homes per year over ten years. for delivering more homes to meet actual need 1. the reconfiguration or redevelopment This figure is based on capacity of land to deliver rather than just satisfying assumed capacity of supported or affordable housing new homes and considers existing local plan policy based on a previous policy approach. would better meet need; or to estimate capacity.

54 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

30,000

25,000

20,000

15,000

10,000 Cumulative number of homes Cumulative of number

5,000 2037 / 38 2029 / 30 / 31 2030 / 32 2031 2032 / 33 / 34 2033 / 35 2034 2035 / 36 / 37 2036 / 39 2038 2039 / 40 2018 / 19 2018 / 20 2019 0 2020 / 21 2021 / 22 2022 / 23 2023 / 24 2024 / 25 2025 / 26 2026 / 27 2027 / 28 2028 / 29

Housing target Key development sites & large windfalls (50+ units) Other windfalls (26–49 units) Small sites (<25 units)

Figure 14: Housing trajectory

55 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

Housing Supply future production of a Site Allocations open space, including trees and soft landscaping, Development Plan Document we are taking a can also help ensure the right kind of growth, 8.5 / We can demonstrate at least five years of more proactive approach to planning for growth where impacts on surrounding neighbourhoods housing land supply to satisfy the requirement to in Westminster. Nevertheless, high existing use are mitigated. identify a five-year supply of deliverable housing values in Westminster mean that it is not always sites available to achieve the housing target of possible to predict when land will come forward 8.10 / Furthermore, in order to ensure that site 1,495 homes per year over this period. Our for redevelopment. This means that large sites will capacities are optimised, no new homes in Housing Trajectory (Figure 14) demonstrates that inevitably continue to come forward as windfalls Westminster (including changes of use and Westminster will be able to meet the housing target, and therefore we continue to include a large residential extensions) will exceed 200sq m of taking account of a range of sources of supply. windfall allowance in our housing trajectory. Gross Internal Area (GIA). This size restriction is This includes an allowance for small sites (below 25 These ‘windfall’ developments are not included needed because Westminster’s position in the units) in line with the Draft London Plan small sites as allocated land in the Plan, but consistent past global housing market can create demand for target for Westminster, which also takes account trends in windfall development are used to super-size properties do not optimise development of both non-self-contained homes and vacant estimate the future scale of delivery from density on our scarce land. The only exception to properties returning to use, which we strongly such schemes. this will be where a larger unit is needed to ensure support – particularly those on Historic England’s the protection of a heritage asset or a converted ‘Heritage at Risk’ register. Density and the size of new homes home as we recognise that it is not always practicable or appropriate to merge parts of the 8.6 / In reviewing our housing trajectory, we have 8.8 / Historically, housing in Westminster has floors to create larger units. The 200sq m limit is considered how changes in our strategic policies been developed at relatively low densities. 62sq m above the highest minimum standard in the will influence housing delivery up to 2040. This This cannot continue in the face of very high Nationally Described Space Standards and is higher includes a high number of smaller sites, based on demand for housing and projected population than the average size of recently built private previous levels of delivery and a stronger level growth. Therefore, as developable land is homes in Westminster (163sq m between 2013 and of policy encouragement in both this plan and the scarce, to deliver our housing targets, higher 2018). The limit will still enable generously sized London Plan. This City Plan is supportive of design density development will be required. Our key homes to be developed to meet demand from the solutions to meet housing needs through less development sites in Appendix 1 have been prime market and large families, but balances that prescriptive design requirements. Taken together modelled at higher densities than in their existing against the other, more strategic housing needs with a more welcoming approach to innovative form, to maximise their potential for new homes. of the city. housing delivery, including through upwards extensions, this plan will deliver more housing 8.9 / Internal design features such as including Permanent temporary sleeping than previous policies have. utility space to dry washing, extra internal storage accommodation (short-term lets) space and partitions that can be moved to alter 8.7 / Historically more than 80% of Westminster’s room layouts can contribute to making high- 8.11 / While delivering new homes is essential, housing delivery has come forward as windfall. density developments acceptable. Good external if we are to meet Westminster’s growing housing Through our key development sites and the design, public realm and provision of high-quality needs we must also ensure that existing stock

56 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

remains available for permanent residents. Westminster has seen the number of properties 1. it can be demonstrated that a rigorous used for temporary short-term lets grow 9. Affordable housing search for sites revealed no sites are significantly since the need for planning permission A. 35% of all new homes will be affordable available for affordable housing in the to short-term let a property was removed1. In addition across Westminster. vicinity that could be reasonably and to the impact on housing availability, this can have viably purchased, including on council unacceptable impacts on the residential amenity of B. There will be no net loss of affordable owned land; and those living in neighbouring properties. Regular noise housing across the city. All residential 2. the site proposed can demonstrably disturbance for neighbours, anti-social behaviour, proposals will provide a minimum of 35% provide more affordable housing and of inappropriate disposal of waste, reduced security and of the total residential units as affordable a higher quality than would have been overcrowding of properties are all consequences of housing on-site if they: possible on or off-site in the vicinity; and this entrenched commercialisation of residential 1. have a site area of 0.5 hectares properties. Restricting change of use to short-term 3. provision off-site will demonstrably or more; or letting will safeguard our existing housing supply and contribute to achieving mixed protect residents from the negative aspects of this 2. are proposing ten or more residential communities. activity. The restriction on short-term letting applies units; or to purpose-built student accommodation outside D. A payment in lieu to the council’s 3. are proposing 1,000 sq m or more of term time, unless the letting is directly linked to Affordable Housing Fund may be accepted residential floorspace (for sale or rent). conferences taking place on the education premises only as a last resort if it is demonstrated to the accommodation is linked to. This is because the council’s satisfaction that no sites are C. In exceptional cases, affordable housing student homes are often situated in residential available for off-site provision. provision can be made off-site (in whole areas rather than on purpose-built campuses or in part) in the vicinity of the host and the amenity of permanent residents must E. 60% of the affordable units will be development. This will only be accepted be protected from the negative impacts of a ‘intermediate’ affordable housing where it is sufficiently demonstrated that churn of holiday makers. for rent or sale and 40% will be social on-site provision is physically or otherwise rent or London Affordable Rent. impracticable or is inappropriate in terms of 1 Since 2015 planning permission has not been required to the quantity or quality of affordable housing F. For intermediate housing, new short-term let a home in London for less than 90 nights to be provided. Provision of affordable within a calendar year affordable homes will be provided housing off-site (in whole or in part) beyond across the indicative income levels set the vicinity of the host development will out in the Planning Obligations and only be acceptable where: Affordable Housing SPD.

57 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

housing in the vicinity means it is close to the host choice and meet the variety of needs of different G. The size of these homes, including the development; however, vicinity is not strictly people and families who are vital to the effective number of bedrooms required to meet need defined to avoid unhelpful restrictions when functioning of the local economy and delivery will be provided in line with the council’s dealing with different site circumstances or of public services in Westminster. Annual Affordable Housing Statement. availability and will be assessed in light of the circumstances of each case. 9.5 / The high cost of housing in Westminster H. The council will maximise provision of makes even relatively small shares of shared- additional affordable housing through 9.3 / All affordable housing requirements from ownership properties unaffordable for many renewal of its housing assets, particularly residential development will be calculated based households eligible for intermediate housing. in designated housing renewal areas. on the total gross residential floor space proposed Therefore, although we support innovative low- Proposals for re-provision of existing (Gross Internal Area). To facilitate large-scale cost home ownership products, most intermediate affordable housing will be at an equivalent estate renewal and deliver mixed communities, homes are expected to be for rent. The household or better quality than existing and will better quality homes and a more appropriate mix income thresholds for intermediate housing maximise the amount of affordable of unit sizes, on estate renewal schemes the 35% products in Westminster will be set out in the housing floorspace. affordable housing requirement will apply across Planning Obligations and Affordable Housing SPD. the regenerated estate, taking account of any affordable homes that have been re-provided. 9.6 / We will work towards 10% of new intermediate 9.1 / Westminster is the second most expensive This is in recognition of the wider benefits brought homes being for either affordable home ownership local authority in the country in which to rent or about for residents of affordable accommodation or rent-based products that help residents move purchase a home. Average house prices are more by estate regeneration beyond just an increase in to home ownership. Based on evidence about than double those for London and more than 20 in numbers. local housing needs, costs and incomes, we times the average Westminster household income. consider that a tailored approach to meet shared The shortage of land, its high price and current Tenure and bedroom split regional and national affordable home ownership funding mechanisms mean that to exceed the ambitions is appropriate and will not prejudice our strategic 35% affordable housing target it is 9.4 / At present, ‘intermediate’ homes make ability to meet other housing needs. essential to require affordable housing up only around 1.5% of Westminster’s housing contributions from private housing developments. stock and our Housing Needs Analysis shows that 9.7 / Our Housing Needs Analysis shows that Developments which fall short of provision of 35% there is a high demand for this tenure. We want to there remains a need for low cost rented housing will be subject to post-permission viability reviews. grow and diversify this sector to create a more in Westminster, and therefore 40% of all new balanced mix of tenures and improve housing affordable homes will be for social or affordable 9.2 / To maintain our stock, where affordable options. Therefore, we will require that 60% of rent. We consider London Affordable Rent to be an homes are redeveloped there will be no overall the affordable housing delivered will be appropriate rental level for Westminster residents net loss of floorspace and re-provision must be ‘intermediate’ housing for rent or sale across on lower incomes alongside traditional social in the vicinity of the original home(s) to maintain a range of household income levels. This is rented accommodation. mixed tenure communities. Provision of affordable important to ensure new homes provide genuine

58 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

9.8 / Although increasing the number of new expected to discuss with us any potential affordable homes of any tenure in the city is a priority, opportunities to provide off-site affordable 10. Affordable contributions we do not support increases in affordable housing housing on existing council owned land either that do not result in an increase in the number of as infill or as part of estate renewal. in the CAZ new homes. Therefore, outside of existing council A. In addition to the provision of affordable housing estates, we do not permit the purchase 9.12 / Where single ownership of a large estate housing in residential schemes, of market tenure homes to change their tenure is a barrier to the delivery of on-site affordable contributions will also be sought from to meet affordable housing requirements. housing, we encourage landowners to deliver certain commercial developments in the on-site affordable housing in ways which do not Central Activities Zone (CAZ) to ensure 9.9 / Registered Provider (RP) owned affordable break up their land ownership. For example, by mixed, inclusive and cohesive communities. homes delivered through section 106 agreements considering becoming RPs in their own right and may change to market tenure provided the unit is transferring affordable units to themselves as RPs. B. Where affordable housing units are vacant, the affordable homes are re-provided required, these should be delivered on-site, elsewhere in the city and the change is part of 9.13 / Affordable housing developments unless it is demonstrably impracticable or a transparent asset management process. completed prior to an application for market unviable to do so. Off-site delivery of housing by public, charitable and non-profit affordable housing should be within the 9.10 / Getting the right mix of sizes is important organisations may count towards meeting vicinity of the host development. Off-site across all tenures. The council’s Annual Affordable future affordable housing requirements to delivery elsewhere in the CAZ will only be Housing Statement will set out up-to-date enable estate regeneration to take place. acceptable where it can be demonstrated affordable unit size requirements based on actual The mechanism for this is set out in the that it will: need and demand shown on the social and Planning Obligations and Affordable Housing intermediate housing registers. Supplementary Planning Document. 1. provide more affordable housing and of higher quality than would have been the Off-site affordable housing Payment in lieu case on-site; and 9.11 / Where it is accepted for residential schemes 9.14 / Where payments in lieu are accepted, they 2. contribute to mixed, inclusive and that affordable housing cannot be provided will be at a level of broadly equivalent value to cohesive communities. on-site, development off-site in the vicinity of the actual provision so there is no financial benefit host site is our priority. This is to ensure mixed from providing a payment rather than delivery of OFFICES and sustainable communities are created and actual units. The value of the payment in lieu is set C. For office (B1) development the following maintained. The off-site housing is expected to out in the Planning Obligations and Affordable contributions will be sought: be higher quality than would have been possible Housing Supplementary Planning Document. on-site e.g. larger homes which better meet 1. For developments where the net identified need, more amenity space or better access to public transport. Applicants are

59 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

10.3 / Since first being introduced, the policy has increase in floorspace is between 1,000 2. For developments where the net had several iterations in response to the market and 2,749 sq m, a payment in lieu of increase in floorspace is 6,500sq m fluctuations and changes to national planning policy. provision of affordable housing at the or above, a contribution of 15% of this Most recently, in response to the loss of office following thresholds: floorspace as affordable housing units, floorspace, the policy was relaxed to give an incentive to be delivered in line with clause B. to applicants to provide office floorspace, reducing Net floorspace increase (sq m) the amount of residential floorspace required to be provided alongside the commercial element. Equivalent percentage of net increase in floorspace required to contribute 10.1 / To balance the need to deliver affordable 10.4 / Despite these changes, it is felt that the to Affordable Housing Fund housing in all parts of Westminster alongside current policy approach is not incentivising growth 1,000 – 1,499 15% the need for continued commercial growth in the in office floorspace, nor contributing sufficiently CAZ, we will seek affordable housing contributions to the delivery of affordable housing in the CAZ. 1,500 – 1,999 25% from certain types of commercial development, Over the last five years, less than 10% of homes 2,000 – 2,749 35% namely office and hotel development above completed within the CAZ have been affordable certain size thresholds. units. This illustrates that the current policy is not fit 2. For developments where the net for purpose as not enough affordable housing is increase in floorspace is 2,750 sq m Historic approach actually being delivered in the CAZ. This is largely or more, a contribution of 35% of this due to the number of alternative options available to 10.2 / A mixed use policy was first introduced into floorspace as affordable housing units, applicants under the existing policy approach, such Westminster’s planning framework through our to be delivered in line with clause B. as making payments in lieu, or delivering affordable Unitary Development Plan (2007) in response to units off-site or via land swaps outside of the CAZ. an imbalance in the delivery of commercial and HOTELS residential floorspace in the CAZ. At that time, Affordable housing contributions from D. For hotel (C1) development the following commercial developments were more profitable commercial development contributions will be sought: than residential and there were concerns that this would lead to the character and diversity of the 10.5 / To simplify what has become a very 1. For developments where the net CAZ being lost if residential development did not complicated policy approach, to encourage a increase in floorspace is between come forward, thereby threatening the building of balance between competing uses and to ensure 2,500 and 6,499 sq m, a payment in sustainable communities. In essence, this policy that affordable housing is delivered in the CAZ, the lieu of provision of affordable housing required the provision of residential floorspace policy now requires office and hotel developments equivalent to 15% of the net increase alongside commercial development, with a above certain size thresholds to contribute to the in floorspace. proportion of the residential element to be delivery of affordable housing, either through delivered as affordable housing if the affordable payments in lieu or on-site delivery. Off-site housing policy threshold was triggered. provision of affordable housing is therefore only

60 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

to be considered in exceptional circumstances, Hotel development Payments in lieu to ensure that affordable housing is delivered 10.8 / The requirement for affordable housing 10.10 / Where payments in lieu are required, they on-site as much as possible where it is viable to contributions for hotel development is set at will be set at a level broadly equivalent to actual do so, and thereby achieve mixed communities. 15% based on viability evidence. Payments in delivery of units so that there is no financial benefit lieu will be required for developments between to providing a payment rather than actual units. 10.6 / Now that there is no longer a requirement 2,500 and 6,499sq m net additional floorspace. The value of payments in lieu will be set out in the to deliver market housing alongside commercial The threshold for on-site provision of affordable Planning Obligations and Affordable Housing SPD. schemes, we have introduced a stepped approach housing units is set at 6,500sq m on the basis that to the requirement for affordable housing. This will this represents a reasonable amount of floorspace ensure that small scale increases in floorspace (i.e. at least 975sq m) to be managed by on existing office and hotel developments are not Registered Providers as affordable housing discouraged or made unviable due to affordable as it represents more than 10 housing units. housing requirements. 11. Housing for specific groups A. Residential developments will provide Off-site provision of affordable housing Office development a mix of units in terms of size, type, and 10.9 / Our priority remains provision of affordable tenure to secure mixed and inclusive 10.7 / A stepped approach to contributions with housing on-site. The requirement for commercial communities, and contribute towards requirements rising from 15% to 35% based on development to deliver on-site affordable housing meeting Westminster’s housing needs the size of the development has been set for units is set at a high level to ensure that these units for different groups. contributions from office development in the CAZ. can be viably delivered and reliably managed by The stepped approach will ensure that a similar Registered Providers. Therefore, off-site provision FAMILY SIZED HOMES level of return is retained by the applicant across of affordable housing will only be acceptable in the a range of development sizes, in line with viability B. New build homes will be designed with circumstances outlined in clause B. Where off-site evidence.2 Larger scale office developments will growing families in mind and 25% of all provision is deemed acceptable, applicants will need be required to provide affordable units on-site. new homes will be family sized. Where to demonstrate that they can provide more and The threshold is set at 2,750sq m net increase in two-bedroom units are provided, the higher quality units than would have been possible floorspace, on the basis that this represents a majority should be large enough to on-site, for example, through provision of larger reasonable amount of floorspace (i.e. at least accommodate two double bedrooms units that will better meet identified need, or through 962sq m) to allow Registered Providers to within a single development. Studios provision of more amenity space or better access manage at least 10 affordable units. will make up no more than 10% of new to a range of transport options. homes within a single development.

2 Westminster Local Plan Viability Report, BNP Paribas, 2018

61 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

C. Conversion of purpose-built single-family 4. the accommodation is being adapted or H. At least 35% of the purpose-built student homes into multiple family homes is altered to better meet specialist need or accommodation will be secured as welcomed. Family sized homes will be to enable residents to remain in their affordable student housing as defined in required where a House in Multiple existing property. the London Plan. All accommodation Occupation (HMO) surplus to requirements should include a proportion of units that (as demonstrated by appropriate marketing OLDER PEOPLE’S HOUSING are adaptable to meet specialist needs. as an HMO for at least 18 months) is E. The council supports the development of proposed to change to market housing. I. Existing purpose-built student high-quality accommodation for older accommodation will be protected unless people across a range of tenures and use SPECIALIST HOUSING its loss forms part of a published strategy classes that meets identified need. of a higher education institution. D. The council supports the provision of well-managed new housing which meets an F. The council will support adaptations and GYPSY AND TRAVELLER SITES identified specialist housing need. All existing alterations to homes occupied by older specialist and supported housing floorspace residents, which enable them to remain in J. Permission for gypsy and traveller sites may which meets a specific local housing need will their existing property. Replacement older be granted where it is demonstrated that be protected from changing to non-specialist people’s accommodation intended to be there is a need in Westminster and they are or supported residential use except where it is occupied by the original occupant(s), will as well-designed developments that will not demonstrated that: far as practicably possible, be located near have adverse impacts on traffic or parking. to the original accommodation. 1. the accommodation is of poor quality, does not meet contemporary PURPOSE-BUILT STUDENT requirements and is not capable of ACCOMMODATION being upgraded; or 11.1 / Westminster has a broad range of housing G. The council supports the development of needs and we support delivery of a range of 2. the use has a demonstrable and new, well-managed, purpose-built housing types and sizes to meet those needs. significant adverse effect on accommodation for students studying at residential amenity; or higher education institutions with a main 11.2 / Our strategic housing requirements are set hub in Westminster. The development of 3. it is surplus to requirements as any out in both regional and local assessments and new student accommodation should not form of specialist or supported housing show that there are shortfalls for all sizes of homes result in the loss of other types of housing. and is being replaced by affordable in Westminster, except for studios. We require a housing; or range of housing sizes across different tenures to be provided to ensure the kind of homes people need are delivered, including lifetime homes.

62 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

Consequently, studios will be restricted to 10% Specialist and supported housing 11.8 / We will only accept the loss of any specialist of new homes within individual developments. housing uses where there has been no interest 11.6 / Westminster’s existing stock of specialist from another organisation providing housing housing provides accommodation tailored to the Family sized homes for any specialist needs in that location or by needs of the vulnerable and others with specific a registered provider for the use of the site 11.3 / To ensure that homes are adaptable, housing needs which are not met by conventional for any type of specialist housing. This will be and families have enough space to grow in their housing. High land values mean there is pressure to demonstrated by the housing being marketed existing homes, we require a proportion of double change low-value specialist housing to higher value for 18 months as a specialist or supported home. bedrooms within each new-build unit. This will private residential accommodation. Without this give growing families the option to remain in their stock, the people who occupy specialist housing 11.9 / Where the loss of an HMO is accepted existing home, rather than move elsewhere or would be unable to remain in Westminster. The following the marketing exercise, we expect out of Westminster. protection of existing, and encouragement of new, it to be converted into family sized homes. By accommodation that meets an identified need is increasing the stock of such homes in the city, the 11.4 / Our Housing Needs Analysis shows that therefore particularly important to ensure inclusivity loss of the specialist floorspace will be mitigated. a large proportion of new homes in Westminster and maintain Westminster’s rich diversity.3 are developed as one- and two-bedroom units. 11.10 / Where new specialist housing is proposed, In order to give families more housing choices, 11.7 / We will resist the loss of specialist housing a management plan will be required and secured 25% of all new homes will be family sized – this if it only requires minor layout changes or via legal agreement or planning condition to means having between three and five bedrooms. improvements in quality to bring it up to standard ensure the new use does not have negative Homes with six or more bedrooms are unlikely to meet modern requirements. However, we impacts on the amenity of neighbouring residents. to meet the housing needs of families and will appreciate that needs and service delivery change The management plan will address parking therefore not be included in the calculation of the over time and specialist housing can become pressures, noise and other potential impacts 25%. Furthermore, the majority of two-bedroom obsolete or surplus to requirements. The loss of on neighbouring residents or vulnerable uses, units within a single development should be large specialist floorspace may therefore be considered such as schools. enough to accommodate two double bedrooms. acceptable to: make optimum use of housing sites, make our housing stock more sustainable as Older people’s housing 11.5 / In new intermediate tenure homes, two and needs change, and deliver our, or other local three-bedroom homes may be permitted with only service provider’s published strategies. 11.11 / Population projections indicate a 52% one double bedroom, if it is required to make the increase in those aged 75 and over living in units more affordable to eligible households and Westminster between 2017 and 2030.4 the new homes are meeting demand on the Additionally, there is expected to be a 45% intermediate waiting list. increase in those over 65 suffering from dementia

3 For new HMOs please refer to the council’s 4 Westminster Housing Needs Analysis, 2019 licensing scheme

63 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

in Westminster between 2015 and 2030.5 There 11.14 / The quality of accommodation for older can maintain familiarity with their surroundings is therefore a growing need for new housing to people is more specific than for other types of and their networks of friends and family. meet a range of older people’s accommodation housing. We will assess the quality of new homes needs. This is not necessarily restricted only to proposed with particular regard to: 11.16 / Housing developed specifically extra-care, sheltered housing or residential for older people will be subject to conditions to –– design features suitable for dementia institutions, although there remains a need for ensure it continues to be used for its original sufferers6 both in the home and in shared these types of accommodation. Meeting the purpose – this may include a minimum age for the spaces which are part of the development; needs of older people can also take the form occupants or the continued delivery of on-site of mainstream housing designed to aid mobility, –– availability of on-site care and support; care, where this is included as part of the adapt to changing health or which facilitate the original development. –– facilities in the development or nearby lifestyles of those in later life, as well as private for community and social interaction; homes marketed specifically to older people. Student accommodation –– access to technology such as tele-care; 11.17 / Westminster has 11 major universities and 11.12 / We welcome new and innovative –– Wi-Fi and broadband; colleges, more than any other London Borough. approaches to delivering this type of housing It is also home to many smaller colleges and across a range of tenures. New homes to meet –– storage options for mobility scooters; professional education institutions. More than the needs of older people will be determined –– adaptability of the units for future a third of higher education students in London with regard to past delivery against the mobility needs; and attend a Westminster-based institution, meaning benchmarks set for different tenures of that there is a high demand for purpose-built older people’s housing in the London Plan. –– access to public transport. student accommodation. Nevertheless, our Housing Needs Analysis indicates that there is 11.13 / Self-contained older people’s housing 11.15 / The location of this type of housing no overwhelming demand for accommodation that does not fall within the definition of affordable can be critical in ensuring a high quality of for Westminster-based students to be housed in housing will be required to contribute to the life for older residents and contributing to their Westminster and there is no evidence to suggest supply of affordable housing. This will be in the independence. Older people are more likely that current levels of provision are affecting form of on-site affordable units specifically for to suffer from memory loss, which may lead to student numbers or profiles. the occupation of older people. feelings of vulnerability, loss of self-confidence and independence. Where older people’s housing is being redeveloped, the re-provision will preferably be in the vicinity of the original accommodation to ensure residents

5 Westminster Housing Needs Analysis, 2019 6 Healthy Building Note 08-02. Dementia-friendly Health and Social Care Environments (Department of Health, 2015) should be consulted.

64 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

11.18 / We will continue to support the 12.2 / We welcome innovative ways to development of purpose-built student 12. Innovative housing delivery deliver more housing and address the high accommodation for institutions with their main cost of traditional self-contained market housing. A. The council welcomes applications for hub in Westminster, secured via nominations If proposals for innovative housing models do innovative models of high-quality housing agreements, in order to balance the demand for not meet the definition of affordable housing – particularly where the new homes are student accommodation against the competing they will be required to contribute to the supply provided at rental levels equal to or less than demands for other types of housing in the city. of affordable housing regardless of what use class Westminster’s intermediate rents, or enable they fall into. This requirement may be waived if access to more affordable homes than 11.19 / Student accommodation must be affordable, the rents charged are at a level comparable to market housing. well-managed and a sufficient proportion must be Westminster’s intermediate rent and these rental adaptable to meet specialist needs. Thirty five levels are secured by legal agreement in perpetuity. B. The council welcomes applications for per cent of accommodation must be provided A deviation from the social/intermediate tenure new homes built using modern methods as affordable student accommodation in line with split set out in Policy 9 may be acceptable if any of construction particularly when they the London Plan. of these models of housing are delivered following contribute to a quick and more sustainable the conditions set out in the London Plan. delivery of homes. Gypsy and traveller sites Self-build and custom-build homes 11.20 / Proposals for new gypsy and traveller sites will be assessed based on identified need for this 12.3 / Self-build and custom-build homes can 12.1 / London’s housing market is evolving. type of housing in Westminster, how the site help deliver new homes that meet the needs and New housing models are emerging in response optimises the land and the likely impacts the site demands of an individual or group who organises to the demand for more (and relatively affordable) will have. The most recent research commissioned the design and construction of the new home, homes and reflect changing lifestyles and ways by the Mayor of London confirms that there is no with or without the help of a specialist developer. of working. These new housing models include: identified need for residential pitches for gypsies and travellers in Westminster.7 The city does not –– self-build and custom-build homes 12.4 / In accordance with the Self-build and have reserves of sites of a size or kind suitable for Custom Housebuilding Act 2015,8 we keep –– build to rent homes use for this type of accommodation and it is a register of individuals and associations of unlikely that there will be any suitable sites –– rent to buy, help to buy and shared individuals who are seeking to acquire serviced available in the future. ownership homes plots of land in Westminster to build homes for those individuals to occupy. The council uses the –– large-scale purpose-built shared living data when preparing housing assessments and and live/work schemes. analysing housing demand.

7 GLA Gypsy and Traveller Accommodation Topic 8 As amended by the Housing and Planning Act 2016 Paper, 2017

65 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

Build to rent homes Large-scale purpose-built shared living 12.9 / Because purpose-built shared living schemes and Live/Work schemes (including live/work developments) will have been 12.5 / Build to rent developments contribute to designed to meet a specific demand, the layout is meeting the demand for rented homes and can 12.7 / Purpose-built shared living can offer an likely to mean that, without significant adaptation, deliver high-quality and self-contained homes that acceptable form of accommodation for young changing the development to meet an alternative are available on longer tenancies. Build to rent professionals who are content to share some residential use will result in a failure to meet the developments often target a certain type of space, particularly if it offers a less expensive minimum space standards. To protect residential residents (e.g. young professionals, downsizers or option (when including service charges) than amenity, we may therefore use legal agreements students) and provide shared spaces and services. conventional self-contained homes. The amount or conditions to prevent shared living developments We welcome build to rent developments especially of communal storage and living space provided from converting to other housing types. when they help deliver a large number of more separately to private spaces should be generous affordable homes and offer longer-term tenancies. and relate directly to the number of occupants Modern methods of construction in the development, to ensure there is sufficient Rent to buy, help to buy and shared space for comfortable living. 12.10 / The architecture, design and construction ownership homes sectors are changing, and new and modern 12.8 / Live/work developments can additionally methods of construction and materials are being 12.6 / Rent to buy, help to buy and shared ownership provide workspace for start-ups and small used. Modern methods of construction can have products can help households on average income businesses alongside homes, which is more a positive impact on the quality of homes, the pace levels save for a deposit to buy their first home affordable than renting office space and will of delivery and its cost. through bespoke rental arrangements. We therefore contribute to the city’s economic growth. However, welcome these products and developments we expect the ‘work’ element to include facilities 12.11 / Modular homes are homes constructed especially when the “rent” element is affordable such as a high-speed internet connection, partially off-site, usually delivered by road to and where the homes are allocated to customers bookable meeting rooms and touchdown working their destination and put in place by crane, where on our intermediate housing register. space that is separate from the ‘live’ element. This they are connected to utilities and fitted out. is to ensure it is quality work space capable of We welcome the delivery of modular homes in meeting modern business requirements. Long Westminster for a number of reasons: the units term management plans will be submitted themselves can be constructed very quickly; alongside proposals for purpose-built shared off-site development means less deliveries being living schemes. made in Westminster as only the ‘modules’ are delivered instead of multiple streams of construction materials and equipment –

66 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

resulting in lower energy use and reduced 13.1 / Housing plays an important role in the emissions; the construction disruption caused 10% of all new-build homes (including safety, health and well-being of individuals to neighbours such as noise, dust and pollution changes of use) will meet Building and communities and in the shaping of from on-site construction is significantly reduced Regulation requirement M4 (3) “wheelchair neighbourhoods. It must therefore be designed compared to traditionally built homes; and more user dwellings”. to a high quality. This is particularly important in homes can be delivered on small plots. Westminster given the growing need for housing C. All new homes will meet or exceed the driving higher density developments. 12.12 / We recognise the design and construction Nationally Described Space Standards industry is changing and we embrace new (where the units are self-contained). 13.2 / High quality can take many forms and technology which helps us respond to the housing can be achieved through design solutions challenge. However, new homes resulting from D. All new-build homes will provide at such as the location of one home’s living room new construction techniques such as modular least five sq m of private external amenity in relation to another’s bedroom, private internal homes must be of the highest quality, with high space for each dwelling designed for living or external amenity space, adaptability standards of quality control throughout the entire one-two persons or more and, where to mobility needs, access to natural light and a construction process. We will only accept modular practicable, a further one sq m for each dual aspect to the home for ventilation to reduce homes in Westminster which are constructed out additional person the dwelling is designed overheating and provide suitable internal air of sustainable materials. to accommodate. Where private external quality. Where it is impracticable or inappropriate amenity space is not practicable to provide dual aspect9 homes (or windows or appropriate: have to remain closed owing to external noise), we will expect design measures to mitigate 13. Housing quality 1. dwellings will have additional internal overheating and to provide adequate ventilation living space equivalent to the external within each property. A. All new homes and residential extensions requirement in addition to the minimum will provide a well-designed, energy space standards; or where this is 13.3 / Applicants will be expected to demonstrate efficient and high-quality living not practicable; and how hazards identified in the Housing, Health environment, both internally and externally. and Safety Rating System10 have been addressed New homes will be designed to a standard 2. the external requirement will be in the design of new homes. that ensures the safety, health and well- provided as communal external amenity being of its occupants. space; or where this is not practicable; and 9 Dual aspect homes have openable windows on two or B. 90% of all new-build homes will meet more walls, allowing for views in more than one direction. 3. the external requirement will be Building Regulation requirements M4 (2) 10 See Housing health and safety rating system: guidance provided as public open space. “accessible and adaptable dwellings” and for landlords and property-related professionals. Also refer to the Council’s guidance on bedsits/studios, self-contained flats, flats in multiple occupation standards and hostel standards.

67 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS CONTENTS

13.4 / The policy requirements apply to: all new External amenity space homes (across all tenures); residential extensions; 13.7 / External amenity space in housing when flats are being merged; or when a change developments contributes to good quality living of use results in new homes. environments and may provide leisure space and pleasant views. The provision of the private Mobility needs external amenity space requirement mainly 13.5 / We need to ensure that all new-build homes applies to new-build dwellings as it is often are adaptable or adapted for wheelchair users, impracticable to provide new external floorspace so new homes are future-proofed for a population within listed buildings and converted homes, as that is living longer (and for less able-bodied – for example – changes to built form and fabric residents). It will also prevent residents being are more restricted. forced to move into specialist housing because their current home cannot meet their changing 13.8 / Moreover, in a densely built environment needs over their lifetime. This requirement applies such as Westminster, it may not always be to new-build dwellings – it is recognised that it is practicable or appropriate to provide private often impracticable to meet the Building external amenity space such as balconies and Regulations requirements within listed buildings gardens. Enclosed balconies or winter gardens, and converted homes, as – for example – changes the use of screens or glass enhancements or to built form and fabric are more restricted. stepping back the facade can help mitigate However, we expect the standards to be met unacceptable potential impacts such as in all types of homes where possible. overlooking, privacy, noise or air quality and make the provision of the private external amenity space Space standards neighbourly and appropriate. Communal external amenity space will be safe, accessible for all 13.6 / In a place where demand for housing is residents across-tenures and well-managed. extremely high and higher density is subsequently the norm, the minimum size of new homes must be kept in check. The Nationally Described Space Standards (NDSS) are therefore adopted in Westminster and will ensure residents have access to a suitable amount of space in their homes.

68 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 HOUSING CONTENTS

69 CONTENTS we create economy. athriving creatingBy place athriving where people to want to be, where peopleA city want to be and want to stay. for flexible that’sworkspaces. A integratedcity and connected. need The demographic. for diverse our suitable that’s housing quality need to respond to people’s changing The needs. need for affordable, our economicFor success to to decades come, continue the in we to as awhole. UK the communities beyond own our benefits that economy an It’s industries. cultural and creative also for finance, and but business Our diverse range of enterprise makes us aglobal hub not for just like is economy other. no of Westminster’s breadth and scale The createsA thriving city athriving economy EMPLOYMENT ECONOMY AND CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

14.1 / Westminster is a global office centre, with an 14. Supporting economic growth D. Proposals involving the net loss of office estimated 8.45 million sq m of office floorspace,1 floorspace from the CAZ will only be ranging from small traditional offices in heritage A. New and improved office and B1 floorspace acceptable in the following exceptional buildings, to large modern floorplates. These cater will be supported to provide capacity for circumstances: for a full range of occupiers, including real estate, at least 63,000 new jobs over the Plan hedge funds, professional / financial services and period, enabling the continued growth 1. the proposal is in a predominantly creative industries. However, since 2005, more and clustering of the creative, knowledge, residential area and would re-instate than 720,000 sq m2 of office stock has been lost and research-based sectors. Additional an original residential use; or in the city – predominantly to residential (including floorspace that meets the needs of modern 2. any loss of floorspace is necessary permitted development schemes). Reduction in working practices, including the provision as part of the renewal of outdated supply has resulted in low vacancy levels (a ten- of co-working space, is supported in stock to secure a high-quality office year quarterly average of 6.4% across the entire principle in the: development with ancillary facilities West End, which includes part of Camden and 1. Central Activities Zone (CAZ), that meets the needs of modern Kensington and Chelsea)3 and high rents. This including the West End Retail and working practices; or trend needs to be halted in order for Westminster Leisure Special Policy Area (WERLSPA) to continue to compete globally, to support the 3. there is no interest in the continued and Opportunity Areas; continued growth of emerging sectors, such as use of the site for office purposes, creative industries and technology, and to adapt 2. North West Economic Development Area as demonstrated by vacancy and to modern working practices. (NWEDA) and Church Street / Edgware appropriate marketing for a period of Road Housing Renewal Area; and at least 18 months, and the replacement Projected need for new office floorspace use is for educational, community or 3. Town centre hierarchy. hotel use. 14.2 / The London Office Policy Review (2017) estimates a need for more than 75,000 office- B. In the NWEDA and the Church Street / E. Proposals within the NWEDA involving based jobs in Westminster from 2016 to 2041 - Edgware Road Housing Renewal Area, the loss of space suitable for small and which equates to more than 63,000 jobs over the a range of workspace typologies, medium enterprises (SMEs) will be resisted. Plan period (2019-2040). Average employment including workshops and studios, Redevelopment proposals will be required densities of 1 worker per 11.3sq m used within the will be particularly welcome. to re-provide existing employment London Office Policy Review would indicate that floorspace, including dedicated space C. Proposals involving the provision of that meets the needs of SMEs. affordable workspace will generally be 1 As of March 2018 – based on 1990 Land Use Survey and pipeline updates supported throughout the commercial areas of the city. 2 Pipeline data, March 2018 3 Central London Quarterly Office Report, Q4, Knight Frank, 2018

72 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

this could translate to a requirement for the delivery 14.3 / Planning for such growth recognises that the growth, will drive demand for future office of over 710,000 sq m of additional office stock in continued loss of office stock from the city at past floorspace growth in Westminster. Westminster to meet demand. However, such rates is unsustainable. This plan therefore provides calculations would assume that additional jobs are stronger protection for existing office floorspace Opportunities for office floorspace growth only created through the provision of new office than has historically been the case, encourages its 14.5 / The West End, along with the Opportunity floorspace. Structural changes in the way offices renewal and modernisation, and seeks additional Areas at Paddington, Victoria and Tottenham are viewed in many growth sectors as places for provision, in accordance with recognition in the Court Road, provide the main opportunities for interaction and collaboration, rather than places to London Plan of the strategic importance of the significant office growth. These areas of the city: go and work at a fixed desk is resulting in a rise in central London office market. agile working practices such as working from home, –– are home to existing concentrations of such use hot desking, and shared workspace models - all of Growth sectors by a variety of occupiers (from small spaces in which enable the more efficient use of space. If this 14.4 / The diversity of Westminster’s economy is Mayfair and St James’s, to large floorplates in continues, it will reduce the extent to which new one of its great strengths, positively contributing to Victoria and Paddington); jobs need additional dedicated office floorspace, its resilience. Alongside its world-class retail, arts and significant jobs growth could be delivered –– include clusters of activity in growth sectors and entertainment, and hospitality offer, the city is through the refurbishment and upgrading of – such as in the creative industries in Soho; highly attractive to a number of economic sectors outdated stock, to better facilitate such working associated with office activity. The city has more –– represent areas of high demand (Paddington in practices through ‘spaceless growth’. The London registered businesses than any other London particular has seen substantial office gains over Office Policy Review also therefore looked at borough in each of the following categories: the period 1997-2018 of over 134,000 sq m);5 alternative scenarios that treats space with lower information and communication, finance and than London average employment densities –– are benefiting from investment in public transport insurance, property, and professional, scientific as excess stock - which could reduce demand infrastructure (including the Elizabeth Line and in and technical.4 It is also second only to the City of for additional floorspace in Westminster to the future, potentially Crossrail 2); and London in terms of businesses administration and approximately 213,000 sq m over the period support services. Together, these sectors provide –– offer opportunities for future growth and 2016-2041 - or 179,000 sq m over the City Plan a diverse range of jobs, including in software intensification. time-period. As future office jobs growth is likely to development, film production, advertising, come from a combination of new office floorspace accounting, legal services, medical research, real and the more efficient use of existing stock, estate, creative industries, investment funds and 445,000 sq m of additional office floorspace (i.e. a insurance. Growth in these high value industries, mid-point between 179,000 sq m and 710,000 sq m) which is projected in the London Office Policy is considered a reasonable minimum amount of Review to underpin London’s continued economic office floorspace growth to plan for - taking account of likely capacity in commercial areas, and the need to respect Westminster’s townscape and heritage. 4 Inter-Departmental Business Register 2018, ONS 5 Pipeline data, March 2018

73 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

14.6 / Office growth in these locations will be to the use class order treats some loss of retail life-cycle of their business. Doing so is consistent secured through a combination of: and other town centre uses to office floorspace as with national and London planning policy that new permitted development, provided certain criteria and emerging business sectors should be planned –– the refurbishment and expansion of existing stock; are met. Additional office floorspace provision for through the provision of a range of workspaces. –– the development of new office buildings at will therefore be supported across our highly a greater density than the buildings they accessible network of town centres as they Protection of central London’s office function replace; and continue to evolve as multi-functional areas 14.11 / Loss of office floorspace from the CAZ risks of commercial activity. –– the inclusion of additional office floorspace as undermining its key strategic employment part of new mixed-use developments; and functions as defined in the London Plan, and as a Changing working practices result, the global competitiveness of the London –– the reconfiguration of existing commercial 14.9 / Technological advances are clearly economy. We have therefore introduced an Article spaces, which could include some small-scale resulting in changing working practices, which 4 Direction to ensure that proposals for loss of change of use that is deemed permitted new and improved workspaces need to respond B1 offices to C3 residential continue to require development. to. A growth in hot-desking, remote working, less planning permission. Given past levels of loss, regimented working hours, freelancing and small and the national importance of central London’s 14.7 / Beyond these key office markets, further businesses are all increasing demand for more office market, the further loss of office floorspace provision of new employment space in the NWEDA flexible workspaces that better facilitate from the CAZ will normally be resisted. and the Church Street / Edgware Road Housing collaboration and provide ancillary facilities on-site Renewal Area can help complement regeneration for workers to help improve their work-life balance. 14.12 / There are, however, some exceptional schemes and secure a more sustainable pattern of circumstances where the loss of some office space growth. New employment space in these areas, 14.10 / To enable growing sectors to continue from the CAZ may be deemed acceptable. Some where land values are lower, can help support small to thrive, new and refurbished employment parts of the CAZ are largely residential in character start-up businesses and enhance job opportunities floorspace should be designed to meet the needs but include isolated office buildings that have in areas of deprivation. They could also offer scope of modern occupiers. This could include providing historically come from conversion of buildings for a more diverse range of workspaces than the dedicated space for hot-desking, informal originally built and occupied as residential. Where office orientated activity found in more central meetings and collaboration, hosting conferences, such office stock does not meet the needs of locations. The provision of affordable workspace and the provision of on-site amenities that helps modern ways of working, and there is limited here, both as a meanwhile use and that provided by make them attractive to a talented workforce. scope for it to be adapted to do so, conversion managed workspace providers, will be supported. Proposals to this effect should be clearly detailed back to its original residential use can provide Such provision elsewhere in Westminster could also on floor plans, with the rationale behind them benefits in terms of townscape, local character, help support growth in small businesses. detailed in planning or design and access and increasing housing supply. statements. Development should also offer flexible 14.8 / Offices are identified in national planning spaces and leasing arrangements that can adapt 14.13 / The upgrading and refurbishment of outdated policy as a town centre use, and recent changes to occupier’s changing demands through the existing stock within commercial areas may require

74 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

some net loss of dedicated office floorspace as they –– an enhanced townscape; requirements for proximity to supply chains, to adapt to meet the needs of modern working inform re-provision proposals. The provision of –– more efficient use of land in areas benefiting practices. This could include the provision of ancillary co-working space within new developments could from infrastructure investment; facilities for workers, such as cycle parking and help meet the needs of SMEs, in addition to offering changing facilities, but also other uses that improve –– the provision of a range of commercial uses other economic benefits, such as facilitating the the working environment, such as an on-site café or that make a positive contribution to the CAZ, clustering of entrepreneurial activity. gymnasium. Within the town centre hierarchy, it could including better quality office floorspace, also include provision for retail at ground floor. alongside much needed housing and affordable housing. 14.14 / There may also be instances where existing 15. Town centres, high streets office stock within the CAZ has reached the end 14.16 / As the principle of redeveloping such sites of its economic life, and there is no interest in has been established through their identification and the CAZ its continued use for such purposes. In such as key development sites, proposals for them will A. Proposals in existing town centres and circumstances, its redevelopment or re-purposing not be required to provide evidence of vacancy high streets will enhance and diversify for educational uses, such as new teaching and and marketing. their offer as places to shop, work and research facilities, can provide economic benefits spend leisure time. in terms of improving skills and contributing to the The North West Economic Development further growth and clustering of knowledge-based Area (NEWDA) B. A1 retail will remain the priority use at industries. Community uses, such as new health ground floor throughout the town centre 14.17 / Promoting growth and diversification in facilities, can help address needs arising from a hierarchy, and at first floor level within economic activity are central to our strategy growing population and provide significant centres characterised by large format, for the future development of the NWEDA. To employment opportunities. Well designed and multi-level stores. It will be supported by ensure growth is not at the expense of local job managed hotels meanwhile, support London’s visitor complementary town centre uses (including opportunities, while the intensification of the area economy and the strategic functions of the CAZ. standalone units and subsidiary uses within to deliver much needed housing is supported, larger stores) that increase customer dwell re-development proposals should not result in 14.15 / Sites included in Appendix 1 have been time, and enhance town centre vitality and the loss of existing employment floorspace. identified as being of strategic importance to the viability. The use of upper floors for delivery of City Plan objectives. They include residential use is supported in principle 14.18 / To assess if development proposals would some sites with dated office stock that does not across all parts of the town centre result in the loss of workspace suitable for SMEs, meet the needs of modern office occupiers. While hierarchy except the International Centres. applicants should provide details of existing and the redevelopment of such sites may result in a net previous occupiers, how much space they rent / loss of office floorspace, they have been identified C. Development within the town centre rented, and at what cost. This will be used alongside as part of a plan-led approach in recognition of the hierarchy will: any information provided by such occupiers on their scope they offer to deliver the following benefits: needs in terms of building layout and locational

75 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY E. D.

proposals are supported in principle. proposals are supported smallincluding stores in redevelopment sizes unit ofretail ofarange provision The Cluster. Retail aCAZ or Centre International End West ofthe part as designated site the unless is also WERLSPA, the within offer. It alsodoes not to proposals apply ofadiversified part A1 an as store within uses inclusion not the but of subsidiary ofA1 loss floorspace, and sub-division the This months. 18 includes proposals involving least ofat for aperiod marketing appropriate as evidenced byuse for purposes, A1-retail continued ofits prospect reasonable no is by evidence there that be supported will unit A1 ofan ofuse retail change permanent the for proposals Cabove, to clause addition In 1. 3. 2.

function of the centre within which it it which within centre ofthe function and enhancesthe role and reflects that format and type ofascale, be Cluster, Major, District or Local Centre. Local or Cluster, Major, District Retail CAZ ofa frontage floor ground the in consecutively uses non-A1 more or three or Centre, International of an inconsecutively ground the frontage floor uses non-A1 more or two in result not maintain frontage; an active and is proposed; and

F. J. I. H. G.

be protected. managed. appropriately be will and viability, and vitality centre town enhance will they that be demonstrated where can it hierarchy be supported will centre town the within spaces of empty Temporary proposals for ‘meanwhile use’ existing A1existing convenience stores will hierarchy, centre town bythe served largely residential areasWithin not well hierarchy. centre town the outside floorspace retail mofnew sq 2,500 than ofmore for proposals required be only will assessments Retail impact (NPPF). Framework Policy Planning National the in out set test sequential the to pass required be will hierarchy centre town the and CAZ ofthe outside fall that sites Only or residential amenity. character local to harm significant cause not do where they CAZ, the throughout principle in supported be Town also will uses centre be mitigated. can vicinity), inbusinesses the of requirements existing operational the surrounding on the area (including impacts where any negative hierarchy CAZ and wider town the centre throughout supported be will markets extended and New

Westminster, in floorspace retail comparison additional m(net) sq 467,811 mand sq 375,468 for between aneed be will there to 2041, 2015 from period the over stores, within shopping and increased space efficiency ofonline use growing the despite that indicate ofscenarios arange on based forecasts /GLA 15.3 growth Retail boundaries. and their vacancies, of levels ofuses, ofmix terms in centres our of performance the monitors which 2018, Check our of Health Centre findings Town the on based are All Clusters. Retail CAZ some and Centres designated plan Local include this through the areas Additional Plan. London the through of centres these are /Most designated 15.2 boundary, are shown in Figure 15. CAZ the of these, along with Local The locations Centres. and Major, District, Clusters, Retail CAZ WERLSPA, the ofCentres West the End and Knightsbridge, and socialise. International includesvisit the It work, to shop, ofareas network adiverse provides and ofLondon, parts iconic most ofthe some 15.1 town /Westminster’s centre hierarchy includes Town hierarchy centre 6 growth will mainly be driven by increased spending spending by increased driven be mainly will growth retail as expected is shopping convenience in growth small-scale Only m. sq -322,286 229,944 to equates this period, Plan the Over continue.

Consumer and Expenditure Comparison Floorspace Goods 6 assuming base expenditure levels ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND 76

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

Figure 15: Town Centre Hierarchy

77 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

from domestic and overseas visitors and workers based on the NPPF definition of main town centre their roles as social spaces, increase customer on comparison goods. The extent and distribution uses, and consideration of the role, function and dwell time, and make them more interesting places of existing convenience shopping in Westminster health of the centre within which it is proposed. to visit. In some instances, this could necessitate means demand for additional provision to meet Typically, it will include uses such as cafés, the loss of some A1 floorspace - such as from the growing resident populations’ day-to-day restaurants, hotels, cultural and leisure uses, and upper floors of multi-level stores. It could also see needs are likely to be minimal. spaces that can host exhibitions and events. These a continued blurring of use classes - for example could be within standalone units or as subsidiary shops that also serve food and drink on site and 15.4 / The increased trend in retail towards larger, uses in a larger host unit. Complementary uses provide exhibition space. While such more successful centres that serve a range of may be subject to requirements to mitigate diversification can help businesses survive and visitors highlights the need to continue to plan for potential negative effects including through the thrive, some such proposals may be classified retail growth in Westminster through the implementation of management plans. In addition, as sui generis, and will need to be considered in intensification of existing centres and high streets recent changes to the use class order means that terms of the impact of any entertainment uses. - where some additional building height can also some loss of retail space and other town centre Where diversification means a unit is legally accommodate office floorspace growth. This is also uses to office floorspace may be treated as re-classified as sui generis, but retail remains the key to why Westminster is anticipated to absorb a permitted development. dominant use, the change in use class will not significant proportion London’s future retail growth. necessarily mean the proposal in unacceptable Furthermore, the Town Centre Health Check 2018 Unit sizes – instead it will be treated on its merits. indicated that town centres and high streets across 15.6 / Subject to the context of a proposed site Westminster largely buck the trend of nationwide 15.8 / Alongside these changes in the sector, and the part of the retail hierarchy it sits within, struggles - with healthy, diverse centres that have further innovation such as the greater use of digital proposals for major new retail and complementary relatively low levels of vacancy. media within stores, and the development of new developments will be expected to provide a range models such as brand showrooms and experience of unit sizes - to encourage variety in the shopping Complementary town centre uses centres, is also welcomed. Well managed pop-up offer and support small business growth. As a and meanwhile uses can also minimise vacancies 15.5 / Where new A1 retail and complementary guide, small shops will generally be considered while a long-term occupier is sought, maintain town centre uses are proposed, they should be as those under 150 sq m gross retail area. active frontages, support small businesses to test of a scale, type, and nature that reflects the role their products, add to the vibrancy of an area by of the centre within which it is located (see Diversification and innovation attracting new footfall, and provide community explanation of each type of centre below). 15.7 / While A1 retail will remain the priority use benefits. All of this, combined with an improved This will ensure the town centre hierarchy is not throughout the town centre hierarchy, to ensure public realm, will help ensure our town centres compromised. Proposals should demonstrate how existing centres thrive, they must also be given and high streets remain at the cutting edge of they will enhance the existing centre and mitigate scope to diversify and evolve to new trends. A the revolution in retail, and offer experiences any potential negative impacts. Determining range of complementary town centre uses of an that cannot be matched by online shopping. whether a non-A1 use is complementary will be appropriate scale will therefore be vital to support

78 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

Markets and minimise disturbance to the amenity of Where temporary consents are granted for non-A1 residential neighbourhoods. Management plans uses (including under permitted development rights), 15.9 / Suitably located, well designed and will be sought through legal agreements in order this will not remove requirements for marketing managed markets can also add to the diversity, to minimise any disturbance - through matters such evidence before any permanent change of use from vibrancy and experience of our town centres. They as the arrangements for setting up and removing A1 retail is considered. can be a source of fresh, affordable, and locally stalls and collecting refuse. sourced food that supports a healthy diet, Permitted development complement the local retail offer, and like Protecting vitality and viability meanwhile uses, support small businesses in 15.13 / In considering change of use proposals, many showcasing their products. Existing council-run 15.12 / Flexibility to support change and innovation town centre uses enjoy permitted development markets within Westminster include: within our town centres and high streets does have rights under national planning legislation. We will to be carefully managed to ensure a critical mass of therefore keep the balance of uses and emerging –– Strutton Ground SW1 retail that attracts shoppers and accommodate clusters across our centres under review through –– Tachbrook Street SW1 projected levels of retail growth. The cumulative loss updates to town centre health checks and use our of A1 retail units and floorspace through the change powers to make Article 4 Directions requiring the –– Maida Hill W9 (temporary consent) of use and sub-division of existing units can harm the submission of planning applications, as appropriate. –– Church Street NW8 appearance, character and retail function of town centres and high streets. A predominance of uses, International Centres –– Berwick Street W1 such as shisha bars, betting shops and fast-food 15.14 / Within the town centre hierarchy, the West –– Rupert Street W1. takeaways, can undermine town centre vitality and End and Knightsbridge International Centres provide viability and be detrimental to public health. Ground London’s prime retail destinations and offer 15.10 / Existing markets will be enhanced floor residential, meanwhile, would break up active unparalleled specialist and comparison retail of through partnership working with traders, frontages and is not identified as a main town centre regional and national importance that draws in residents and businesses, in accordance with use in the NPPF. The permanent change of use of an international visitors. The West End International our Markets Strategy. Where it has been A1 retail unit, or proposals to sub-divide it and lose a Centre includes Oxford Street, Regent Street and demonstrated that existing markets are no subsequent standalone A1 unit will be considered in Bond Street, while Knightsbridge International longer viable in their existing form and location, terms of its impact on the health of the centre and will Centre includes Brompton Road and extends proposals for comparable re-provision in the require marketing evidence demonstrating that beyond the city boundary into the Royal Borough of vicinity impact on the surrounding area. continued retail use is no longer viable. Loss of A1 Kensington and Chelsea. A1 comparison retail is the floorspace to accommodate subsidiary uses within dominant use in these centres, which are largely 15.11 / Proposals for new markets will be directed to an A1 unit, however, will not require marketing characterised by large format stores, often provided our town centre hierarchy and commercial areas of evidence in the interests of enabling existing over multiple floors. the wider CAZ - to support the existing retail offer businesses to diversify, innovate, survive and thrive.

79 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

15.15 / The Mayor of London has identified these 15.17 / As the UK’s premier shopping street, the welcomed to help the West End to grow, not only centres as being of high commercial growth impact of changes to the retail sector will likely be as a global shopping destination, but also as an potential7 and therefore especially suitable for further most strongly felt in Oxford Street – particularly enhanced leisure and employment destination. large-scale retail growth. To reflect their role and given the existing presence of large format stores Policy therefore provides for greater flexibility of uses function, retail provision should be predominantly and the presence of multiple stores by the same within the WERLSPA than elsewhere in the town for comparison shopping and maintain a strong retail operators. Comprehensive proposals for the future centre hierarchy - recognising the interdependency core at ground floor level and immediately above. of the area that respond to these challenges are of the mix of uses in this wider area. Complementary town centre uses that enhance therefore set out in the Oxford Street Place Strategy customer experience will be focussed on upper and Delivery Plan. This includes proposals for an 15.20 / Continued growth in the West End will make floors, alongside other commercial uses, including enhanced public realm befitting the status of the an important contribution to meeting Westminster’s office floorspace. While residential use of upper area, that will provide a more attractive shopping employment growth targets. To ensure such growth floors can help sustain smaller town centres and high environment and user experience. occurs in a manner that maintains and enhances the streets that do not generate high footfall, they are not West End’s global reputation, and improvements to supported within the International Centres to ensure: West End Retail and Leisure Special Policy the local environment are secured, we will continue Area (WERLSPA) to work within the West End Partnership (WEP) and –– they do not fetter opportunities for these with other stakeholders. 15.18 / The WERLSPA covers the wider West End, commercial centres of international importance where there is an insatiable demand for new to continue to grow and diversify; CAZ Retail Clusters floorspace across all land uses. Beyond the West –– the scale of commercial activity in these End International Centre, lie iconic areas of retail and 15.21 / The CAZ Retail Clusters provide clusters of centres, and their operational requirements, leisure activity, such as Covent Garden, Leicester retail and other complementary town centre uses are not compromised. Square and Theatreland. Away from the main that make a major contribution towards the strategic shopping streets, the land use is highly diverse, functions of the CAZ, as set out in the London Plan. 15.16 / Where provided, non-A1 uses will normally be containing a mix of commercial activity, including Most are designated through the London Plan, subsidiary to primary A1 uses, and will enhance and retail, pubs, bars, restaurants, theatres, cinemas and though some additional areas have also been sustain, rather than dilute the centre’s comparison other entertainment venues. Together, these provide re-classified from designations in the previous City shopping role. Convenience shopping, such as a wealth of attractions that draw in visitors and make Plan as ‘other centres in the CAZ’ or ‘named streets’. supermarkets, could also dilute the comparison a major contribution to London’s world city status. All CAZ Retail Clusters meet the needs of a shopping offer and present significant servicing The mix of uses also provide rest and refreshment combination of residents, workers and visitors, issues and they are therefore discouraged. for workers and shoppers during the day. adding to central London’s wide appeal. Catering to this wide audience, the offer in some clusters 15.19 / Alongside retail growth, a balanced mix of includes large format retail over multiple floors. New complementary leisure, entertainment, food and development will respond to local character in terms 7 2017 London Town Centre Health Check, drink and cultural and employment offers are of the scale and nature of the proposed uses. The Greater London Authority, 2018 nature of activity across the CAZ means that in many

80 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

instances retail and other complementary town proximity of Praed Street to the Paddington of a range of shops and services close to where centre uses will be welcomed above the ground Opportunity Area is likely to increase demand for people live can be particularly important for the less floor, though proposals will need to respect that the retail floorspace that is more focussed on new mobile. Over the Plan period, these centres will CAZ is also home to a large residential population. resident’s needs than the current offer, which is more maintain a healthy mix of uses that includes a range Supporting larger scale retail and complementary orientated towards visitors, tourists and workers. Such of convenience shops for local residents to carry out town centre uses within these clusters can also help provision could also help serve existing residential their day-to-day shopping needs, supplemented by respect the character of parts of the wider CAZ that areas to the north (around Little Venice) that have complementary uses that enhance the centres’ vitality are predominantly residential. limited convenience retail floorspace nearby. The and viability. This includes uses such as banks, advice presence of boutique fashion and independent centres, doctor’s surgeries and cafés. Queensway/ Westbourne Grove Major Centre retailers in small format stores is fundamental to the character of St John’s Wood High Street, although 15.25 / New Local Centres have been designated 15.22 / Queensway / Westbourne Grove Major there is a lack of leisure and community facilities in through this plan, based on the findings of the Centre is the only Major Centre in Westminster. It is the centre. Harrow Road currently suffers from a Town Centre Health Check 2018. They include the designated as such due to the scale and nature of its comparative lack of quality and diversity in its retail designation of a previously unidentified centre mix of convenience and comparison retail activity offer. A balance therefore needs to be found between at Elgin Avenue / Chippenham Road, and the and complementary town centre uses. It has a protecting the remaining retail and allowing for other re-classification of small centres in Pimlico and traditional high street character largely surrounded uses that provide new employment opportunities and Fitzrovia that serve a primarily local function. by residential areas and provides an important bring greater activity to the centre. Church Street convenience shopping function to these local provides a range of shops and services to local 15.26 / Beyond the existing town centre hierarchy, residents. However, an over-concentration of residents and has a long-established antiques market we will work with neighbourhood forums to identify entertainment uses and the loss of retail have and theatre that hosts community events. A growth in additional retail frontages of importance to weakened the vitality and viability of the centre, retail, cultural and community facilities in the area will neighbourhood areas and support neighbourhood which now needs reversing. Over the Plan period, support sustainable growth as regeneration plan policies to guide development within them. new development that reinforces the centre’s retail proposals come forward. function through opportunities for ground floor retail The Central Activities Zone (CAZ) with residential or complementary town centre uses Local Centres above is welcomed, supported by new community 15.27 / Whilst not forming a part of Westminster’s facilities and investment in the public realm. 15.24 / There are numerous Local Centres in town centre hierarchy, the wider CAZ as defined in Westminster. They are smaller in scale than District the London Plan covers much of the city. Town District Centres Centres, playing a more localised role for residents centre uses provide a key element of the mix of uses and workers. They normally contain a mix of within it and contribute to its character and strategic 15.23 / The District Centres of Praed Street, St Johns convenience goods shops, local service uses, such as functions. However, the CAZ is also home to many Wood High Street, Harrow Road and Church Street pharmacies and launderettes, restaurants, cafés and local residents and some parts of it are also wholly each have their own distinct character and challenges pubs at ground floor. These centres can provide a residential in character. To respect its many that new development will need to respond to. The focal point for community activity, and the availability functions, policy support is provided for town centre

81 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

uses where they would not be detrimental to local 15.30 / It also found that these parades are in character or residential amenity. Our approach to close proximity to better performing designated Outside of the CAZ, arts and cultural uses requirements for sequential tests and impact centres that provide a greater critical mass of will be of a scale and nature appropriate assessments – as set out in the NPPF – reflects that activity. As such, and given the struggles smaller to the local context and of benefit to the whilst commercial uses should be supported within centres face, only existing A1 convenience stores local community. the CAZ, the town centre hierarchy should provide within these parades are considered to merit the key focus of retail related growth. policy protection. Flexibility is offered for other C. Commercial developments associated units to be converted to residential or community with an arts or cultural use should be Existing convenience stores outside of the uses - where such proposals would not clearly ancillary, maintain its core arts or town centre hierarchy compromise any neighbourhood plan cultural function which could not otherwise designations and secure a high-quality be achieved, and be of clear and lasting 15.28 / The extent of Westminster’s town centre design that enhances local character. benefit to that use. hierarchy means that most residents benefit from good access to a diverse range of shops and D. In the exceptional circumstances where services. However, outside of the CAZ there are it is necessary to redevelop a theatre or some residential areas that are not within easy 16. Visitor Economy cinema, a replacement of equivalent size walking distance (i.e. 400m or less) of a designated A. We will maintain and enhance the and standard will be required. Proposals town centre or high street. In such areas, where attractiveness of Westminster as a visitor to improve theatres and cinemas will be isolated A1 convenience stores that do not form part destination, balancing the needs of visitors, encouraged and should have particular of a wider parade exist (e.g. a corner shop), they businesses and local communities. regard to their heritage designation. provide a vital function for meeting the day to day needs of surrounding communities and can help ARTS AND CULTURAL USES EVENTS IN THE PUBLIC REALM avoid unnecessary trips by car. B. All existing arts and cultural uses will be E. Events in the public realm will benefit the 15.29 / Furthermore, outside of the CAZ some protected. New arts and cultural uses will city, its people and enterprises. They small undesignated parades of shops and services be supported in: should support the character and function exist. The Town Centre Health Check 2018 found of the area in which they take place and 1. Strategic Cultural Areas when they that these suffer from: must be organised in ways that minimise complement the existing cultural the impact on the long-term access –– vacancies; offer; and to open space, amenity of residents, –– poor physical appearance; 2. the town centre hierarchy; and businesses and others, and maintain the quality of the public realm. –– concentrations of uses detrimental to public health 3. commercial areas of the CAZ. such as hot food takeaways and betting shops.

82 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

16.1 / The visitor industry forms an important part Theatreland, Trafalgar Square, the National and HOTELS AND CONFERENCE FACILITIES of Westminster’s economy, creating a significant National Portrait galleries and Somerset House. The number of jobs. Growth in this sector must be Millbank SCA along the River Thames includes Tate F. Existing hotels will be protected, except balanced with the need to protect the liveability Britain and the Chelsea College of Art and Design. where the proposal is in a predominantly of the city and enhance participation of local In the Knightsbridge SCA a concentration of residential area and would re-instate an communities in cultural activities. institutions of international importance includes the original residential use, or where the Royal Albert Hall, the Serpentine Gallery, the Royal existing use has significant negative Arts and cultural uses College of Art and the Royal College of Music. effects on residential amenity. 16.2 / Attractions, events, businesses and 16.5 / We recognise that commercial activities, G. New hotels will be directed to the institutions in Westminster attract visitors from such as cafés and restaurants, can help arts and CAZ, other than in streets that have around the world and contribute to the appeal cultural facilities to attract additional visitors and a predominantly residential character, of the city. These include uses that represent generate income to fund their core activities. and to town centres that are district a major part of the nation’s cultural heritage, However, these activities should not dilute the centres or higher in the town centre such as the Westminster World Heritage Site, primary arts or cultural function of the venue, hierarchy. New conference facilities London Zoo and Lord’s Cricket Ground. harm the character of the use or compromise will be directed to the CAZ. its operation. We only support these ancillary 16.3 / There are many parts of the city that have activities when they are part of a long-term H. Extensions to existing hotels should be a distinct cultural focus or present a more localised strategy to maintain and enhance the arts or linked to the upgrading of the hotel and cultural offer. These include Soho for film and cultural value of the venue. Management plans the application should consider their visual effects, Church Street for art and antiques, may be required to mitigate any potential impact on the wider area. and Covent Garden for street entertainment. negative impacts of these activities. We seek to protect both those uses of national PUBLIC TOILETS and international significance as well as those 16.6 / Given their valuable economic and that serve particularly local communities. I. Safe, secure and publicly accessible reputational contribution to Westminster as a Developments that enhance the visitor experience toilets will be required in proposals cultural centre, replacement theatres and cinemas and provide interesting activities for residents that generate a large amount of visitors may be required to be provided within a stated will be supported in appropriate locations. including large retail, leisure and period to ensure the continuity of the use. Any entertainment developments, tourist replacement theatre or cinema should seat at least 16.4 / The designated strategic cultural areas attractions and transport interchanges. the same number of people as the original and contain a number of renowned arts and cultural be fully equipped to cater for live theatrical uses, which we seek to promote, protect and productions. A reduction in seating capacity enhance. The West End Strategic Cultural Area may be allowed as part of cinema or theatre (SCA) has one of the largest clusters of cultural and refurbishments, if this is necessary to improve entertainment uses in the country, including

83 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND Strategic Cultural Areas Cultural Strategic 16: Figure 84

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

accessibility or visibility, or other improvements 16.10 / Management plans are required to set centres), where they enhance their role and relating to the operation of the theatre. out how the event will be managed; the length function and there are no adverse impacts on of time necessary for set-up and dismantling of the wider area, including on residential properties. 16.7 / We recognise the difficulties faced in any structures or equipment required; and how When assessing proposals for new hotels and upgrading theatre facilities to meet the needs of the organisers will cover the cost of, and hotel extensions, we will take into account the site theatregoers and the standards they expect, while contribute to any clean-up of public areas and location, relationship to neighbouring uses, scale minimising adverse effects on theatrical heritage. return of functionality of space required after the of accommodation and facilities proposed (the We will continue to work closely with the theatre event.9 They should also set out arrangements to number of bedrooms and nature of other services industry and other agencies to seek to resolve these work with the police, fire and ambulance services the hotel offers), highways and parking. issues, whilst ensuring that Westminster’s unique as part of the event, where appropriate. heritage is maintained. We will continue to consult 16.14 / There is a need to ensure a balance with The Theatres Trust and the Society of London 16.11 / Proposals for temporary events will be between hotel and residential uses so that they Theatres on applications relating to theatres. assessed based on the short-term impacts of the can all function well, while also ensuring a good event itself, but also the cumulative impacts of all quality of life for residents. Particularly large or Events in the public realm events in the local area – including road closures intensively used hotels or conference facilities and residential amenity. are often not compatible with predominantly 16.8 / The public realm is an important arena for residential streets, because the amount of activity an increasingly diverse range of functions, Hotels and conference facilities they generate can cause amenity problems. experiences and cultural activities for the nation as a whole. These range from international sporting 16.12 / Any significant decline in the extent of 16.15 / The change of use of hotels to residential events, bespoke art installations, Armed Forces visitor accommodation in Westminster would use will be encouraged where the existing hotel commemorative events, to the Lord Mayor’s have significant impacts on strategically is not purpose built and is demonstrated to be annual procession, Royal celebration events, important central London activities and levels causing adverse effects on residential amenity. Pride London and a rich variety of other of employment. Therefore, a strong level of commercial, civic and cultural events. protection is given to existing hotels. Public toilets 16.9 / Although many events will not require formal 16.13 / The CAZ is the centre of commerce and 16.16 / Publicly-accessible toilets provide an planning permission, we intend to ensure our activity in London, served by excellent national important facility for residents, workers and planning functions are aligned with other powers and international public transport connections. visitors. They contribute to keeping London’s and responsibilities in managing events safely and It is therefore an appropriate location for hotels streets clean, and reduce the risk of anti-social effectively, with any negative impacts on the built and conference facilities. Hotels may also be behaviour. They are especially important for some environment minimised and mitigated.8 appropriate in all town centres (except local groups, such as the elderly, families with children, or those with certain health conditions.

8 Our emerging Active Events Protocol should be consulted 9 The Royal Parks and Westminster’s Paddington Recreation Ground utilise management plans for temporary events which could be used a template for other management plans.

85 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

16.17 / For the purposes of this policy, large retail 17.1 / Westminster has a vibrant entertainment developments are those having 1,000 sq m of gross reasonable prospect of its continued use sector, including a huge range of food and drink floorspace or more. Large entertainment uses are as a public house, as evidenced by uses. This plays a vital role in supporting the those having 500 sq m of gross floorspace or more. appropriate marketing for a period of at visitor economy, providing local employment The toilets should be maintained at the applicant’s least 18 months. opportunities and contributing to London’s world- expense as part of the overall maintenance of any city status. Much of the entertainment sector is development. Toilets accessible to the public HOT FOOD TAKEAWAYS AND DELIVERIES concentrated in the West End, but clusters also should be clearly sign-posted within developments exist in other parts of the city, such as Edgware C. Proposals for hot food takeaways within to ensure they are easily located and the needs of Road and Queensway / Bayswater. We are 200m walking distance from the entrance less mobile people must be taken into account in working with partners to prepare a vision for the of a primary or secondary school will not be the design of new toilets. Facilities should be well- Evening and Night-Time Economy and support supported. managed, and their opening hours should reflect proposals that help us achieve this vision, the needs of the area. including by providing a more diverse offer. D. Provision for food deliveries from restaurants or cafés, including facilities for 17.2 / The impacts of food, drink and entertainment platform-based delivery, will only be uses on the surrounding area need to be carefully supported where it is demonstrated that managed. Proposals for food, drink and the facilities do not result in a change of 17. Food, drink and entertainment entertainment uses should be accompanied by use to hot food takeaway or other uses A. Proposals for food and drink and an assessment of development impacts, which including composite / sui generis uses. entertainment uses will be of a type should be proportionate to the likely impact of the and size appropriate to their location. proposal. This is based on the principle that larger E. Purpose-built facilities for platform-based The over-concentration of those uses will scale proposals, and those with later opening deliveries will only be supported when they be prevented where this harms residential hours, will be likely to have disproportionately are purposely designed to limit the adverse amenity or the vitality and character of the larger impacts on surrounding areas. These impacts of this type of delivery mechanism. local area. Applications for entertainment impacts will also be felt more strongly within uses will need to demonstrate wider smaller commercial areas, given their role and SHISHA SMOKING benefits for the local community, function. The type of use proposed, as well as where appropriate. F. The use of premises and outdoor areas for the concentration of uses in proximity, will also shisha smoking will not take place under or be taken into account. Applicants will be required PROTECTION OF PUBLIC HOUSES adjacent to windows of existing residential to produce a management plan setting out the properties. Any negative effects must be steps identified as a result of the assessment. B. Public houses will be protected throughout fully mitigated by incorporating measures Implementation of management plans will be Westminster, except where there is no into the design and operation. secured by planning condition and / or legal agreements as appropriate.

86 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

17.3 / The cumulative impact of multiple food, 17.6 / Latest records indicate there are 439 17.8 / In recent years there has been significant drink and entertainment uses in a particular area public houses in Westminster, of which 87% are growth in mobile technology-based platforms can have a negative impact on the functioning in conservation areas and 28% are listed. They used to order hot food. This often leads to negative and use of an area and can negatively impact can support the economy by providing direct impacts on the amenity of residents and businesses residential amenity. We will therefore prevent employment, supporting food suppliers and the arising from the noise and other disturbance from the over-concentration of these uses and require brewing industries, and helping make Westminster large numbers of delivery agents outside food proposals to make sure any negative impacts are a desirable place in which to work and do business. premises or elsewhere. Hot food takeaways fall managed (applying the Agent of Change principle). Despite this, they are facing increasing threat of under a different use class (A5) to restaurants and closure. Recent monitoring data shows that over cafés (A3) and by their nature, can result in 17.4 / Applicants proposing new entertainment recent years there has been an increasing loss increased disturbance as a result of motor vehicles, uses will set out in their planning statements the of floorspace for drinking establishments. These mopeds and motorbikes taking deliveries of food benefits that the local community will gain from include venues aimed at specific communities (such to customers. It is becoming increasingly these uses. Arrangements may be formalised as LGBTI+), the decline of which we seek to halt commonplace for restaurants and cafés to offer through a legal agreement, where appropriate. through the introduction of this policy and by takeaway services with the rise of platform-based Local community functions provided by new working in partnership with community groups, delivery options. We recognise the convenience of entertainment uses could include discounted landlords, the Mayor of London and other partners. delivery platforms, however, we will ensure that any access to space for community functions, or the negative impacts are minimised and managed. We provision of learning and training for the local Hot food takeaways and deliveries will therefore seek to control numbers and hours of community associated with the use. operation of food deliveries through planning 17.7 / Reducing health inequalities is a priority conditions to ensure any such services are ancillary for us. Although being overweight has different Protection of public houses to the primary use of an A3 premises and will seek causes, evidence11 shows a link between the to promote use of sustainable delivery options. 17.5 / Public houses can play an important role consumption of hot food takeaways and obesity. as social hubs at the heart of communities, add We resist new hot food takeaways opening up 17.9 / Westminster’s dense pattern of development to the diversity of commercial areas, and make a around schools, to protect our children from the means that it is unlikely that there will be anywhere positive contribution towards townscape and local negative consequences of consuming junk food. within its boundaries that are suitable for stand- identity. They include many premises that have Due to the high density of schools in Westminster, alone food preparation facilities supporting these Best Bar None10 status. The protection of public a buffer of 200m is appropriate to allow some platforms given their likely amenity impacts, houses is supported by both national policy and growth in the sector in the right locations. particularly in terms of noise and odour. the London Plan.

10 Best Bar None is an accreditation scheme promoting 11 London Plan topic paper: Hot food takeaways, responsible management and operation of alcohol Mayor of London, 2018 related premises.

87 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

Shisha smoking 17.13 / Outdoor smoking at shisha bars, which often occurs late at night, can harm residential and deliver new infrastructure. New 17.10 / Shisha is a flavoured tobacco smoked amenity through increased noise, odour and facilities will be of a nature and scale to through a waterpipe or hookah. Shisha smoking fumes, particularly in areas with large meet identified need and be sufficiently creates smoke containing chemicals which are concentrations of these uses. A loss of retail units flexible to meet the requirements of linked to several life limiting diseases, including to shisha bars can result in a change of character providers as they may change over time. cancer, heart disease and respiratory disease, and undermine the vitality and viability of as recognised by Public Health England. Smoke established shopping areas. The use of outdoor B. Where new facilities are provided they free legislation means it cannot be smoked tables, chairs, and charcoal burners can also block should be designed to accommodate indoors in public places, but a licence for pavements making it more difficult for people to a range of community uses wherever outdoor smoking is not required. get around the city. We will therefore seek to possible. The council will strongly control numbers and opening hours of shisha bars encourage the co-location of facilities 17.11 / An increased amount of outdoor shisha and use planning conditions to secure the and access for appropriate organisations premises are emerging in the city, often as management of waste disposal and positioning and the local community. ancillary uses within cafés and restaurants that of tables and chairs. Management arrangements then incrementally expand. Estimates indicate will be required to safeguard residential amenity EXISTING INFRASTRUCTURE that from the period 2010 – 2013, the number of and minimise disturbance. In addition, given the premises more than doubled, from 60, to more C. Existing community facilities and floorspace amenity and public health impacts of shisha than 130.12 Such premises are distributed across the will be protected other than where it can be smoking, we are lobbying for increased licensing city, with notable concentrations in Edgware Road. demonstrated that either: powers to control the proliferation of shisha bars. 1. the loss or relocation is necessary 17.12 / We consider shisha bars a sui generis use, to enable service provision to be meaning that where an applicant seeks to change reconfigured, consolidated, upgraded, use to a shisha bar planning permission will be or delivered more effectively as part required. Where this is sought, applicants will be 18. Community infrastructure of a published strategy to improve required to demonstrate how any potential services and meet identified needs; or negative impacts of the proposal can be mitigated and facilities through the implementation of a management plan NEW INFRASTRUCTURE 2. there is no demand for an alternative for the premises. social and community use for that facility A. New community infrastructure and facilities or floorspace, evidenced by vacancy will be supported where there is an and appropriate marketing for at least identified present or future need. The 18 months. council will use its Infrastructure Delivery Plan alongside other strategies to plan for 12 Reducing the Harm of Shisha: towards a strategy for Westminster, 2017

88 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

–– Social facilities e.g. meeting halls, public New community infrastructure D. Where a reduction in community floorspace houses, libraries and places of worship. 18.4 / New development will place pressure on is deemed acceptable, other ancillary uses existing community infrastructure and facilities will be permitted where they support the 18.2 / Community facilities and infrastructure and these must continue to be provided to meet continued function of the main can be either publicly or privately owned and/or the changing needs of the city, and to mitigate community use. operated. Wherever possible, they should have impacts on existing services, as Westminster shared or extended use to serve the wider grows and changes. We also want to be sure that E. Within designated retail centres, where the community, for example, the use of school sports new facilities are only provided where they are loss of community facilities is deemed facilities beyond the school day for the wider really needed to avoid facilities being developed acceptable, replacement uses with an community. Shared use of facilities can encourage where there is not an identified need, resulting in active frontage will be prioritised. For other active lifestyles, help ensure the effective use development sites being under-optimised. We will sites in the CAZ, other town centre uses will of resources and land, reduce maintenance and take into account the role of the proposed facility be supported in principle. In all other cases, management costs, and encourage joined-up and beyond just local need – some facilities have a residential use will be preferred. coherent service delivery. wide range of functions including at a regional, national or even international level, for example, 18.3 / Westminster’s community infrastructure certain educational or medical institutions. needs will be kept under review to ensure they continue to be met. We will work with providers 18.1 / Community infrastructure and facilities are Existing community infrastructure of local services to review existing provision, to integral to supporting people’s everyday lives, identify future needs, and ensure the most efficient 18.5 / We accept that demands change over time being used by residents, workers and visitors, and use of land and other assets across the public and this may result in changes to the pattern of are a vital resource to support successful places estate in delivering services, with particular use service delivery. To be resilient to such changes, and communities. Community infrastructure and made of the Infrastructure Delivery Plan (IDP). We community facilities need to operate in buildings facilities consist of: will utilise other council strategies to inform the IDP that meet the modern needs of the service and and deliver required infrastructure including our those who use them. This may mean that –– Health facilities e.g. hospitals, GP surgeries. existing Active Westminster Strategy, our co-location of a number of different community –– Education facilities e.g. schools, nurseries, emerging Playing Pitches and Built Facilities facilities within a single site or building is universities and colleges. Strategies, School Organisation and Investment appropriate, alongside rationalisation of floorspace Strategy and the Health and Wellbeing Strategy, to facilitate this. A good example of this is the –– Sports and leisure facilities e.g. leisure centres, as well as documents prepared by other recent refurbishment of Seymour Leisure Centre swimming pools, outdoor playing pitches and infrastructure providers such as the NHS in Marylebone, which has combined swimming Multi-Use Games Areas. and Thames Water. facilities with a gym, sports hall and climbing –– Cultural facilities e.g. theatres, museums and centre. There are also plans to co-locate a library art galleries. facility at the site to create a community hub.

89 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

18.6 / Nevertheless, we will only accept a rationalisation of community floorspace if it is part 19. Education and skills 1. financial contributions towards of a published strategy and brings overall benefits employment, education and skills A. The council will support the provision of to the local community or is necessary to deliver a initiatives; and new or expanded primary and secondary new or improved facility. It should not compromise schools and further education facilities, to 2. for larger schemes, the submission the core function of any part of the facility. We meet the needs of a changing population and implementation of an Employment will encourage (and where appropriate, lead) and enhance education provision. and Skills Plan. coordinated joint work by public service providers to ensure the most effective use of landholdings, B. The improvement and expansion of identifying shared opportunities to improve the Westminster’s world-class higher range and efficiency of services through a “One Education educational institutions will be supported Public Estate” approach. in principle, in recognition of the economic 19.1 / Current pupil projections13 indicate a decline benefits they provide to Westminster, in demand for primary school places, and a 18.7 / There may be some cases where London and the UK. This includes growing demand for secondary school places commercial uses operating alongside community proposals for the upgrading of existing, in Westminster. However, demand will continue infrastructure will help the function and viability of and provision of new, teaching and to fluctuate over the Plan period as the population the facility, such as an on-site café. Such uses will research facilities and the provision of grows, children move through the school system, be supported where they are ancillary to the main purpose-built student housing that meets families move in and out of the city, and schools community use and the requirements of clause C the needs of students studying at a higher are expanded or contracted. In the short term, are met. education institution in Westminster. our school expansion programme, along with additional capacity being created through the 18.8 / There may be cases where there is no C. Where new and additional educational relocation of Marylebone Boys Sixth Form to continued need or demand for the provision facilities are provided, proposals for their Paddington, will meet demand for additional of community facilities. Where this may be the use outside of core operation hours for secondary school places in the city.14 Beyond this, case, the early marketing of vacant community community or recreational use will be demand will continue to be monitored as pupil floorspace to assist in identifying any alternative supported in principle. projections are updated, and additional capacity occupiers who could make a good public service planned for in accordance with our annual School use of the site is strongly encouraged. A D. Major developments will contribute to Organisation and Investment Strategy. comparable market value when undertaking improved employment prospects for local a marketing exercise will be based on the facility residents. In accordance with the council’s being public, regardless of whether it has most Affordable Housing and Planning recently been occupied by a private social / 13 Greater London Authority, 2018 Obligations SPD, this will include: community occupier. 14 See Westminster Infrastructure Plan (Technical Assessment 2006 – 2026, URS), School Organisation and Investment Strategy and emerging Infrastructure Delivery Plan

90 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

19.2 / Currently there is a lack of suitable and 19.5 / To maximise the community benefits of new 19.7 / We will therefore use the opportunities available land for the construction of new schools educational uses, applicants are encouraged to offered by new development, in both the within the city, though there may be opportunities make facilities available and adaptable for public construction and operational phases, to to adapt the existing school portfolio in response use, where this does not compromise their primary improve residents’ access to skills, training and to changing demands for different age groups. purpose and operational needs. Multiple purpose employment. This will include seeking financial Further unidentified opportunities could also use of such facilities can help make efficient use of contributions towards employment, education and emerge over the Plan period. scarce space and overcome any deficiencies in skills initiatives, and on larger schemes, requiring dedicated community space within a locality. apprenticeships and job placements in 19.3 / The presence of world-class higher accordance with targets set out in an agreed educational institutions, including London Skills Employment and Skills Plan. Securing job School of Economics, Imperial College London, placements within the end use of a development, 19.6 / Whilst Westminster has the highest and King’s College London, form an integral part rather than solely in the construction phase will be number of jobs of any London borough, it of the character of central London. They provide important to ensure residents fully benefit in the relies heavily on in-commuting of skilled a significant source of employment, contribute long term from the diverse opportunities economic workers.15 As the heart of a world city, this will towards a highly skilled workforce, support the growth brings. The Westminster Employment continue to be the case over the Plan period - as clustering of the knowledge economy, and are Service16 will provide a key point of contact to new job opportunities continue to attract workers internationally recognised for their research assist developments in delivering benefits to from across the south east and beyond. However, reputations. Such benefits help London local residents. Further details of how financial alongside this, it is important that Westminster compete on a global stage as a location contributions will be calculated, when Employment residents, particularly those from disadvantaged of choice for business. and Skills Plans will be sought and what they backgrounds, fully benefit from the diverse should include, will be provided in our Affordable range of opportunities economic growth brings. 19.4 / To maintain and enhance their international Housing and Planning Obligations SPD. Removing barriers to local employment can standing, and continue to attract the best talent improve resident’s life chances, help support to London, higher educational institutions are likely continued business growth, and reduce to need to upgrade, and / or provide additional traffic movements. teaching and research facilities over the Plan period. Such investment is supported in principle - in recognition of the benefits this will bring to the 15 Local Economic Assessment, 2014 16 www.westminster.gov.uk/employment wider economy.

91 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

suppliers, applicants are encouraged to engage 20. Digital infrastructure, have been exhausted. Proposals on the with a range of providers in the design of major highway should also demonstrate that it developments. To minimise disruptive street information and communications is not feasible to locate on existing works, major commercial development will provide technology buildings or other structures. or contribute towards communal entry chambers that enable the quick and easy installation of new A. Investment in digital and ICT services to meet occupiers’ needs. telecommunications infrastructure will be supported. The public benefits of proposals 20.3 / Although future investment in digital for new infrastructure will be weighed 20.1 / The last twenty years have seen huge infrastructure and ICT is vital and of clear public against impacts on local character, heritage technological advances resulting in a shift in benefit, it must be provided and coordinated in a assets, or the quality of the public realm. ways of working and significant growth in manner that respects Westminster’s rich heritage. technology-based sectors of employment. New apparatus such as boxes that enable the roll B. Major new developments and infrastructure Access to high quality digital infrastructure and out of 5G should be sited away from listed projects will be designed to enable the information and communications technology (ICT) buildings wherever possible, but applicants should installation of the most up-to-date are increasingly viewed as a vital component of also seek to minimise unnecessary and visually standards of digital connectivity and ensure modern life – by residents, visitors, and a wide obtrusive clutter of the public realm. easy maintenance and future upgrading as range of businesses. The government’s UK Digital technologies and standards improve. Strategy sets out the importance of providing 20.4 / Proposals for new standalone apparatus world class digital infrastructure to improve will only be supported where all reasonable C. Major commercial developments will connectivity, and the government is investing options for sharing existing facilities, or the use provide a communal chamber on-site for £1 billion to accelerate investment in, and roll-out of less obtrusive locations, have been ruled out telecommunications equipment or make of, next generation digital infrastructure, as impracticable. It is recognised that there are an appropriate contribution to the cost of including 5G and full fibre broadband.17 some forms of telecommunications infrastructure providing one nearby. where co-location or sharing of facilities may not 20.2 / The continued growth and success of be an option. D. Opportunities for co-location, shared Westminster’s economy is dependent on securing facilities and innovations such as smart access to digital infrastructure and ICT services of 20.5 / Equipment that is no longer required should street furniture should be explored where the highest specification available that is future- also be removed in accordance with Ofcom’s new digital and telecommunications proofed to enable upgrades as technologies and Electronic Code of Practice, to reduce clutter and infrastructure is proposed and proposals standards improve. To ensure end users can improve the experience of pedestrians and other for standalone apparatus should exercise choice regarding technologies and highway uses and the quality of the public realm. demonstrate that such opportunities

17 UK Digital Strategy, 2017

92 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

21.2 / Soho Special Policy Area (SPA) has a 21. Soho Special Policy Area D. The scale and setting of Soho and Golden cosmopolitan character, density and diversity of squares will be protected. The function of uses. It functions as a place to live, work and visit, A. Development in the Soho Special Policy these squares and of St. Anne’s Churchyard with all these roles taking place within its dense Area will reflect its unique character and as green spaces will also be protected and network of narrow streets, and often within the function and demonstrate how it respects, enhanced. Other opportunities to improve same buildings. Soho has a distinctive scale of protects and enhances the existing scale the public realm should be explored in uses, typically smaller than elsewhere in the West and grain of the built environment and the development proposals. End, typified by the small scale of its individual unique mixture of uses present there. commercial units at street level. The dense nature of the urban fabric lends itself to smaller B. The following uses will be supported: floorplates, which typically support tenants from 1. small and medium enterprise (SME) specialist and smaller scale industries, particularly 21.1 / Soho has been a mixed residential and workspace, particularly in the the cultural, creative and visitor sectors and for commercial district since the mid-18th century, creative sectors; SMEs. Smaller units and flexible workspaces to when it was popular with artisans, traders and encourage this type of use will be supported. 2. specialist retailing; immigrants, often fleeing conflict in continental Europe.18 In the 19th and 20th centuries, Soho 3. housing that meets the needs of those 21.3 / Where development proposals involve the further developed as a centre for the creative arts, working in the area; amalgamation of units behind retained facades, particularly the British film industry. By the 1960s, particularly at ground floor level, they will be 4. LGBTQI+ venues; Soho had become a focal point of London’s music considered in the context of Soho’s existing scale scene, alongside its boutique shops and other 5. new live music venues; and grain of development. Where proposals seek bohemian culture, and has become a home for to reduce the duplication of cores in adjoining 6. physical, social and green infrastructure; London’s LGBTQI+ community. The area was buildings, for example to improve energy designated a conservation area in 1969. Since the 7. small-scale hotels; efficiency, they may be justified provided the 1960s, Soho has become a major tourist attraction ability of the commercial floorspace to be let to 8. food, drink and entertainment uses, and has become more commercialised. It still has a several individual occupiers is not inhibited. subject to clause C. unique role to play within the wider West End and it is important that its distinctive qualities are 21.4 / It is important to maintain the mix of uses C. Proposals for new A3 restaurant/café uses conserved and enhanced. present in Soho to protect local character. This or A4 drinking establishments will be policy aims to promote a range of uses that reflect considered with regard to their cumulative Soho’s cosmopolitan and diverse nature. impact on the character of Soho’s streets and mix of uses. 18 Soho Heritage and Character Assessment, 2018

93 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND Figure 17: Soho Special Area Policy Figure 94

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

21.5 / Changes of use to new A3 restaurant or 21.8 / Soho has a range of housing stock, (2014). Furthermore, Soho Square and Golden café uses or A4 drinking establishments will be meaning it is a place where people can both live Square are designated London Squares that assessed in terms of their cumulative impact on and work. Proposals for new housing in Soho will perform an important heritage function. As a Soho’s streets. This will ensure that the mix and demonstrate that they are able to meet the needs result, their setting and scale should be respected balance of uses in the area is maintained by of those working in the area by contributing to the in development proposals. preventing over-concentrations of A3 and A4 range of stock including through the provision of uses. Although already prevalent in Soho, further affordable housing. clustering of these uses can have a detrimental impact on the area’s overall mix and can lead to 21.9 / Soho is also a centre with a high incremental changes to its character. concentration of LGBTQI+ venues and they remain an important aspect of its character. The number 22. Mayfair and St. James’s 21.6 / Applicants should address this issue in their of LGBTQI+ venues in Westminster has declined Special Policy Areas Planning Statement and should consider both the by 46% between 2006 and 2018, representing a A. Development in the Mayfair and St. James’s surrounding uses at ground floor level and the loss of 16 unique venues.19 It is therefore important Special Policy Areas (SPAs) will existing servicing arrangements in the vicinity of that we seek to retain existing, and encourage complement, support and enhance the the site. Noise and amenity impacts will also be new, LGBTQI+ venues so that Soho remains a character and status of both areas as carefully considered, especially where there are centre for the LGBTQI+ community. Existing centres for the art trade and luxury retail. residential uses on upper floors in the immediate LGBTQI+ venues will be protected through this vicinity of the site. plan and new venues are explicitly encouraged B. Additional floorspace for use as art within the SPA to ensure Soho retains its status as galleries and antique trading is supported 21.7 / Although hotels are generally considered a centre of LGBTQI+ culture, retail and nightlife. in principle within both SPAs. The net loss acceptable within the CAZ, within Soho, smaller of gallery floorspace from either SPA will scale or ‘boutique’ hotels are more appropriate 21.10 / Soho’s green spaces are rare and be resisted. due to Soho’s existing character. Large-scale formalised green space only exists in Soho hotel facilities will not generally be considered Square, Golden Square and St Anne’s Churchyard. C. The council will work with landowners to acceptable within the SPA, as their larger floorplate It is therefore important that their function as green protect existing niche luxury and specialist requirements are likely to erode local character spaces is protected and enhanced where A1 retail floorspace including antiques through the loss of smaller scale existing units, possible, with further opportunities explored for within both SPAs. Additional retail of this which will also displace other commercial uses, as providing green infrastructure and enhanced type that complements the character of well as having potential amenity and environmental public realm in new development. Public realm either SPA will be supported. impacts. Larger floorplate units are generally at improvements should implement the findings and odds with Soho’s existing scale and grain. recommendations of the Soho Public Realm Study

19 LGBTQ+ Cultural Infrastructure in London: Night Venues, UCL Urban Laboratory, 2006-present

95 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Mayfair and James’sFigure St. 18: Mayfair Special Area Policy ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND 96

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

22.1 / Together Mayfair and St. James’s are of nearby Bruton, Bond and Albermarle streets. prestigious locations with long standing The areas character and function are highly 23. Harley Street Special international recognition, and a distinctive influenced by the art trade, with galleries being pattern of specialist uses including art galleries, a long-standing feature and draw of the area Policy Area antiques traders, and luxury retail. They also have – attracting collectors from all over the world. A. Development in the Harley Street Special a rich visual townscape and history, with grand Policy Area will support and enhance its formal buildings including palaces and formal 22.4 / Art galleries have also been in existence continued role as an international centre open spaces. While their heritage value is in St. James’s for several hundred years. Today of medical excellence, complemented recognised through wider conservation area the area contains a number of small independent primarily by residential use. designations, the pattern of land use within the businesses employing specialist and skilled SPAs acts as an attraction for international workers, that attract clients from all over the world. B. New medical and complementary facilities visitors and investors and have a broader The internationally renowned Christie’s Auction will be supported and existing floorspace significance for London’s economy. House is located in the centre of St James’s, protected. Its loss will only be permitted in surrounded by commercial art galleries. the following exceptional circumstances: 22.2 / Both areas are home to niche and bespoke retailers. Examples can be found on 22.5 / Proposals for new development in either 1. where there is no reasonable prospect Jermyn Street and the arcades linking it to area will demonstrate that it respects and of its continued use for medical use or Piccadilly. Jermyn Street is renowned for shirt complements the area’s character and status, given complementary facilities, as evidenced makers, grooming products and accessories their contribution to central London’s global appeal. by vacancy and appropriate marketing including hatters and shoe makers amongst other Proposals for additional gallery floorspace, antiques for a period of at least 12 months; and uses, which are also found in the neighbouring trading, and luxury, bespoke and niche retail, are 2. the proposal is for high quality streets and arcades, such as wine merchants, therefore welcomed. In seeking to protect existing residential development that does not tobacconists and other niche uses. character, it is recognised that existing lawful A1 materially affect the character and galleries may be able to change to other A1 uses function of the area as a centre of 22.3 / Mayfair is the historic centre of the art without planning permission. We will however use medical excellence. market in London and the UK. It is home to many our powers to ensure that any floorspace at risk commercial art galleries, the internationally through redevelopment or other substantial works renowned Sotheby’s and Bonham’s auction requiring planning permission are re-provided in houses on New Bond Street, and the Royal replacement or refurbished buildings, and that Academy of Arts on Piccadilly. Most of the retail they will be subsequently protected by galleries are now found in the southern part of legal agreement. Mayfair, with clusters on Cork Street and parts

97 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Harley Street Special Policy Area Policy Special Street Harley 19: Figure ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND 98

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

23.1 / Harley Street is a national and international means that ancillary patient and family centre for medical excellence and has been the accommodation is sometimes required 24. Savile Row Special home to a wide range of medical disciplines for within or near medical institutions. Therefore nearly 200 years. It has more than 5,000 medical accommodation specifically for patients and their Policy Area practitioners,20 adds to the economic diversity of families may also be considered a complementary A. Development in the Savile Row Special the city, and provides education and training facility, but will be restricted to such occupancy Policy Area (SPA) will complement and services. The clustering of medical uses in the through use of legal agreements. enhance its continued role as an area is specifically recognised in the London Plan international centre of excellence for and its proximity to, and links with, the medical 23.4 / In common with many parts of the bespoke tailoring. research cluster around Euston gives it a particular CAZ, the area is also home to some residential strategic significance. properties. Where it can be demonstrated B. New bespoke tailoring uses will be through appropriate marketing evidence (see the supported, particularly at lower floor levels. 23.2 / The townscape and heritage value of the glossary) that space is no longer needed for Any new retail or complementary town area is recognised through the wider conservation medical or support services, residential use may centre uses will be of a scale that respects area designation. As such, the impact of therefore be acceptable. Legal agreements will the unique role, character and function development proposals on this setting will be an be used to ensure any accommodation cannot be of the area. important consideration. The continued evolution converted to general purpose short-term of the Special Policy Area (SPA) to meet the needs accommodation; to ensure the area’s existing C. The net loss of dedicated tailoring of modern medical practices is supported to function and character is not eroded. floorspace from the SPA will be resisted. ensure the area continues to attract the world’s best medical talent.

23.3 / We will seek to protect existing and support new medical floorspace and complementary facilities in the area to ensure continuation and extension of the benefits of the clustering of these uses. Complementary facilities include physiotherapy and health training services. The nature of treatments provided in Harley Street

20 www.harleystreetmedicalarea.com/aboutus

99 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Savile Row Special Policy Area Policy Special Row Savile 20: Figure ECONOMY EMPLOYMENT AND 100

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ECONOMY AND EMPLOYMENT CONTENTS

24.1 / The cluster of bespoke tailoring 24.3 / The unique status of the area as a specialist establishments in Savile Row has been cluster is acknowledged in the London Plan. Given established for centuries. It is globally synonymous its status, demand for tailoring floorspace within with premium bespoke tailoring. Premises on the the area remains strong, and the presence of east side of Savile Row include a mix of workrooms existing bespoke workshops within premises and retail elements that are both visible from street make the area distinct from other luxury retail level, and as such are categorised as sui generis. nearby. To enable the tailoring industry to continue To the west of Savile Row A1 uses dominate, whilst to thrive and grow within this globally recognised to the north the mix of uses includes art galleries destination, the net loss of dedicated tailoring and retail uses complementary to the predominant floorspace from the area will be resisted. tailoring uses in the area. Some office space is also interspersed throughout the area. The rich 24.4 / Any new commercial development within townscape and heritage value of the area is the SPA should complement the role and character recognised through conservation area of the area, which because of narrow pavements, designations. lends itself to specific purpose visits for bespoke items, rather than high footfall retail and flagship 24.2 / The clustering of uses and floorspace within stores associated with principal shopping streets Savile Row results in agglomeration benefits for nearby such as Regent Street and Oxford Street. established businesses that contribute to the Legal agreements will therefore be used to restrict character of the area, a diverse economy within the size of individual stores, in order to preserve the city and the UK tailoring industry. The numbers the SPA’s inherent character. The average size of tailors employed within existing premises are of existing retail units in the SPA is 266 sq m. increasing, including through a growing number As such, stores of up to 300 sq m gross internal of apprenticeships that is helping to ensure the floorspace will normally be considered reasonable. continued long-term success of this specialist cluster and the tailoring industry more widely.

101 CONTENTS A city that connects us to that connects healthierA city living. West to End make streets, Westminster walkable a truly city. busiest centre of our very even areas, the in pedestrianised more accessible with real difference,greenera city as it’sBut area the of ‘active travel’ where we’ll see the around Westminster. driving than of our waterways will choice become amore to attractive people travel. More ‘joined-up’ options public and transport greater use we moveAs towards 2040, we move towards more sustainable greater challenge. a environmental with us presents turn in which growingA growing puts pressure city system, on our transport with ahealthierConnecting way of life CONNECTIONS

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

25.1 / We are committed to improving the quality of 25. Sustainable transport 3. Positively contribute to the reduction of life for people who live, work or visit the city. A key the dominance of private motor vehicles element of this is creating a more joined up and A. The council will support a sustainable both in terms of traffic and congestion, integrated transport system which positively pattern of development which maximises whilst not worsening the excessive supports the existing and future built environment, trips made by sustainable modes, creates levels of on street parking and tackling its relationship with the public realm and which safer streets for all, reduces traffic, poor air quality. encourages healthier living and active travel. improves air quality and reflects the objectives in Westminster’s Transport and 4. Contribute to the London Plan’s 25.2 / This policy reflects this aim and embodies Public Realm Programme and Local Healthy Streets approach to improve Westminster’s 2019/20 to 2021/2022 Local Implementation Plan 2019/20 to 2021/2022. air quality, reduce congestion and Implementation Plan objectives which are to: make Westminster’s diverse B. New development and the connected –– deliver sustainable development for growth communities become greener, transport modes should contribute towards healthier and more attractive places –– deliver safer roads for us all maintaining and enhancing Westminster’s in which to live, work or visit. places and streets as one of the most –– deliver better air quality for future generations attractive and liveable areas in London. 5. Major development should provide or –– prioritise the transport network for pedestrians financially contribute towards creating C. Development must: –– promote better health and inclusivity well-connected, high-quality, 1. Positively contribute towards the convenient, safe cycle infrastructure –– deliver a sustainable future network improvement of its public transport and routes. –– implement the ‘pay for your impact’ principle. nodes in terms of accessibility and legibility and the improvement and 25.3 / There is a strong connection between our delivery of walking and cycling routes aim of promoting sustainable transport, the city’s that serve a site in order to create an existing urban structure and character and the environment where people actively need to guide development in a manner which choose to walk and cycle as part of responds to the needs of a 21st century city. To everyday life. achieve this, active, efficient and sustainable travel should be a key element considered in new 2. Support the reallocation of road and developments. This responds to the need to development space to promote walking, create an integrated transport network that cycling and the use of public transport minimises the impact that motorised traffic where appropriate. has on growth by directly designing in more pedestrian and cycle measures.

104 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Road safety Greener City Action Plan 2015-2025 indicates that recognises that as central London grows it is parts of the city are among the worst performers in imperative that we work with applicants, land 25.4 / Transforming road safety for all road users air quality tests in Europe. Seeking to reduce NOx owners and other stakeholders to grow the city in and ensuring that all future road safety schemes emissions by discouraging motor vehicle use will a more sustainable manner where active transport and projects steadily reduce causalities will deliver contribute to reducing the exposure of children modes and co-ordinated delivery and servicing of upon our emerging 2019 Road Danger Reduction and vulnerable people to transport-related air buildings is delivered on the street through a Strategy and the Mayor’s Vision Zero ambition.1 pollution and to delivering Westminster’s Air greater use of developer funded Community Creating safer environments will promote active Quality Strategy and Action Plan. Infrastructure Levy (CIL) contributions. travel which in turn is supported by our other strategies such as the Walking Strategy2 and Growing demand 25.10 / Related to this is the need to cater for the initiatives such as the emerging City Kerbside proper consideration of a proposal’s transport Hierarchy which calls for calmed traffic and 25.7 / There is a wider need to deliver a impact. As a result, applicants of major improved and safer facilities for walking and sustainable future network by recognising that as developments are urged to engage with our pre- cycling. These aims are also reflected in localised central London grows the transport network will application process at the earliest possible stage initiatives such as in the Oxford Street District. need to be developed in a manner that meets the to discuss the potential need for the submission of demands of the majority in terms of encouraging either a Transport Assessment and Travel Plan, or Public Realm and Healthy Streets more use of active travel options, like walking and a Transport Statement and Local Level Travel Plan. cycling along with use of the bus, underground 25.5 / A fundamental instrument in delivering and national rail networks. a sustainable pattern of development and 25.11 / The submitted information should be sustainable transport is development’s sufficiently detailed and accurate to enable us to 25.8 / The emphasis towards more sustainable relationship with an improved public realm. fully assess the development proposal. This may modes of transport is supported by Westminster include traffic modelling to demonstrate that having one of the lowest car ownership rates in 25.6 / Approximately 1.1 million visitors step into development proposals will not have an impact London3 and is rated above the London average Westminster each weekday so ensuring that all (individually or cumulatively) on the flow of traffic. in terms of walking activity.4 highways and public realm projects prioritise the A road safety audit/assessment may also be needs of the pedestrian is essential. This aligns necessary on specific schemes. 25.9 / The “pay for your impact” principle with Mayor’s Transport Strategy and its headline outcome to deliver Healthy Streets for London and the objectives of our Health and Wellbeing 3 74% of English households have a car, and 58% of by Sport England, 2015/16) Strategy which identifies a high prevalence of London households. Westminster has the fifth lowest childhood obesity within Westminster. Our car ownership rates in London (at the time of the Census) at 37% (Census, 2011) 4 67% of residents walk for 30 mins at least three times 1 Vision Zero Action Plan (2018) a week while the London average is 60% ranking 2 Westminster’s Walking Strategy (2017) Westminster 5th of 33 boroughs. (Active People Survey

105 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

26. Walking and cycling 4. Facilitate the improvement of high- 1. provide for and make contributions quality footpaths to Department for towards connected, high quality, A. Development must promote Transport minimum standards5 with convenient and safe cycle routes for sustainable transport by prioritising regard to existing street furniture and all, in line with or exceeding London walking and cycling in the city. layout including through the provision Cycle Design Standards; of land for adoption as highway. WALKING 2. enable and contribute towards 5. Enable footway widening, re-surfacing improvements to cycle access, including B. Development must: and de-cluttering where increased the delivery of current and planned cycle 1. Prioritise and improve the pedestrian footfall is expected, to be suitable for routes identified in the council’s Local environment and contribute towards vulnerable road users including older Implementation Plan and existing and achieving a first-class public realm people, people suffering from potential Cycle Permeability Schemes; particularly in areas of kerbside stress, dementia and disabled people. 3. meet the cycle parking and cycle including the provision of facilities for facilities standards in Appendix 2. Where pedestrians to rest and relax (including CYCLING it is not possible to provide suitable seating) and high-quality and safe C. Development should contribute to short-stay cycle parking off the public road environments and crossings, improvements to deliver a first-class highway an appropriate on-street where needed. public realm which supports cycling location should be considered provided 2. Contribute towards improved legibility by improvements to legible signage, it does not conflict with improvements to and wayfinding including signage to key provision of access and facilities that do and the quality of the public realm; infrastructure, transport nodes, green not conflict with the needs of pedestrians 4. provide links to public transport nodes; spaces and canal towpaths (such as or compromise safety and addresses risks through TfL’s Legible London). posed to cyclist from other transport modes. 5. contribute towards improved wayfinding; and 3. Be permeable, easy and safe to D. To promote cycling and ensure a safe walk through, that enhances existing 6. promote and contribute towards the and accessible environment for cyclists, routes which are adequately lit, creates introduction and expansion of cycle major development must: step-free legible access and entrance hire facilities. points whilst providing direct links to other pedestrian movement corridors and desire lines. 5 Local Transport Note 1/12 DfT 2012

106 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

26.1 / We will continue to improve conditions 26.5 / These interventions will contribute to 26.8 / Through co-ordinated efforts to improve for pedestrians and cyclists through a variety achieving the ambitions of our Walking Strategy the environment for cyclists, cycling can become of interventions including the development of to increase the percentage of daily trips that a more attractive transport option resulting in our cycle network, upgrading the public realm, resident’s make on foot from the current 84% an increased shift from the motor car. This will managing parking demand, reducing severance, to more than 92% by 2027. This means that contribute towards a reduction in harmful pro-actively place shaping, junction improvements Westminster’s people would have the highest emissions leading to better air quality, as well as and introducing traffic calming measures. walking levels in London. improving health by enabling an active lifestyle.

Walking 26.6 / New development can facilitate change to Cycle routes people’s walking habits by providing permeable 26.2 / Pedestrians, particularly those with mobility 26.9 / There are now more than 730,000 cycling trips spaces with direct, safe and attractive walking difficulties, are the most vulnerable of all users of per day in London and cycling in central London routes. These spaces should both minimise the the highway and their personal safety can be has increased by 8.9% since 2014. Within Westminster, conflict between pedestrians and competing compromised by poorly designed developments. a number of strategic cycle routes exist, including the uses such as servicing or car parking and ensure National policy states that priority should be given London Cycle Network, Cycle Superhighways, movement and the quality of the public realm is not to pedestrian movement as a sustainable mode Quietways, and the Thames Cycle Route. Along impeded by street clutter whilst catering for the of transport, and the London Plan emphasises the with our Cycle Permeability Scheme, which seeks to specific needs of pedestrians with mobility issues. need to secure a significant increase in walking immediately improve upon the safety and permeability The emerging Site Allocations Development Plan in London. of other key sections across the Westminster Document will provide further detailed guidance highway network, these form an important element on design principles that can help achieve these 26.3 / Prioritising pedestrians has multiple of London’s cycle network. These routes will aims, whilst further guidance on how the needs of benefits, including easing the pressure on the continue to be improved through further investment pedestrians can be met is set out in Westminster’s public transport and road networks, encouraging to ensure they are intuitive, visible and safe, and are Walking Strategy. healthier lifestyles, and making places feel safer well integrated with existing infrastructure. through increased natural surveillance. ‘Healthy Cycling Streets’ that provide attractive walking Facilities for cyclists environments is a key pillar of the Mayor of 26.7 / Similarly to walking, cycling has multiple 26.10 / Provision of cycle parking and storage London’s Transport Strategy which we support. benefits. It enables people to lead healthier, facilities, as well as facilities for cycle hire, are more active lives, can help to reduce the pressure essential in order to encourage this mode of 26.4 / It is also more space efficient than other on highway capacity and public transport, facilitate transport. Therefore, the needs of cyclists should forms of transport enabling development to make improvements to the public realm and enable be given careful consideration during the design the best use of the available land whilst reducing greater numbers of people to use the existing of new developments as provision of parking and the environmental and health impacts of motor road space. storage space is intrinsically linked to the quality vehicles, which is of particular importance in of the public realm. Westminster which has a dense urban pattern.

107 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Figure 21: Cycle Routes 21: Figure CONNECTIONS 108

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

26.11 / However, pressure from competing uses, 27.1 / A high-quality public transport system is high PTAL values across the city and the limited intensively used areas of the city; essential to our strategy to promote sustainable space on offer within Westminster’s fine grain travel patterns in the city, with less reliance on 3. management of coach routes stops urban environment mean that provision of short- private cars and increasing use of other modes. and stands whose use may be intensified stay cycle spaces will not always be appropriate. As a result, there is a need to continue to upgrade subsequent to the relocation or This approach is reflected in Westminster’s travel public transport infrastructure and its relationship redevelopment of Victoria Coach Station. pattern that suggests people don’t generally cycle with the public realm in locations such as railway to visit areas like the Central Activities Zone (CAZ) B. Development must improve the stations where a large number of people and many of Westminster’s town centres. accessibility to, and legibility of existing congregate and busy transport nodes exist. and proposed public transport by creating 26.12 / Major developments may also need to and improving walking and cycling links 27.2 / As most of Westminster’s built environment provide new cycle docking facilities for cycle hire, to stops or stations. has a fine urban grain and space is limited, in addition to parking facilities. Applicants should improvements to the accessibility and quality of seek pre-application advice to determine these C. Major development must: public transport infrastructure are required to in requirements and refer to Westminster’s 2014 order to maximise use of these modes, especially 1. make a financial contribution towards Cycling Strategy which has further information. by disabled people, the elderly, young children improvements to the public realm which and others for whom public transport accessibility facilitates improvements to the is a barrier. Improvements to routes to and from operation of the bus network and public transport nodes (bus stops and stations) associated infrastructure; are critical in persuading more people to use 27. Public transport and 2. support car clubs, cycle hire facilities buses and trains. infrastructure and other sustainable transport initiatives, such as electric vehicle 27.3 / Major investment will be necessary during A. The council seeks better connectivity, charging infrastructure where they do the lifetime of the Plan to improve the efficiency and legibility, quality, usability and capacity in not detrimentally impact upon public effectiveness of the transport infrastructure serving public transport. Therefore development realm improvements and pocket parks; Westminster and to ensure it remains fit for purpose. should help to support the: and This includes a package of measures to increase 1. investment in strategic transport the capacity and reliability of public transport. 3. improve access to public transport infrastructure including the Elizabeth facilities by promoting walking and Line and Crossrail 2, HS2, mainline 27.4 / As resident, worker and visitor cycling and through their design termini and key underground stations; numbers continue to rise, improvements to rail improve the legibility of transport nodes infrastructure are needed to increase capacity and 2. streamlining of bus services and the and interchanges. connectivity, reduce overcrowding and improve relocation of standing facilities to less rail’s attractiveness as a sustainable mode of

109 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

Figure 22: Strategic Transport Infrastructure

110 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Figure 23: Edgware Road Safeguarding Area

111 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

transport. It is therefore essential to ensure that Highways consideration is given to how rail passengers 1. provide car club membership for 27.6 / Local road improvements may sometimes continue their onward journeys and the impacts all residents and provision of car be necessary, particularly in areas of substantial this has on other parts of the transport network club spaces; regeneration or development activity. Edgware and public realm. As a result, we will work with Road is expected to experience development 2. ensure that all outdoor and open Network Rail, TfL and other agencies involved in activity along the road frontage over the Plan parking areas are designed to a planning rail services to ensure these synergies period, but narrow sections of it currently cause standard which accommodates the are taken into account at the earliest stages. congestion. As a result, we will continue to need for safe pedestrian and vehicle safeguard this location in conjunction with any movement and creates permeable Coach travel redevelopment proposals that may allow or require links through the site; 27.5 / Victoria Coach Station (VCS) is the country’s the acquisition of land affected by the safeguarding. 3. prioritise the issue of parking spaces largest and is considerably exceeding its original within development to families with built capacity, resulting in substantial congestion young children; and and environmental and amenity concerns. We will continue to work with TfL and National Express 28. Parking 4. let, rather than sell, parking spaces to to find an appropriate strategy to relieve these new residents on a short-term basis. A. The parking standards in Appendix 2 impacts in the short-term. In the long, term we will apply to all development except in C. The council will apply the maximum support the closure of VCS and relocation of new parking zones B and F where the following non-residential car parking standards coach terminal provision. As such VCS has been maximum residential standards will apply: set out in Appendix 2. allocated as a key development site. A suitable new location (or locations) for a coach station must 1. Up to 0.4 spaces per residential D. When considering parking impacts, the support multi-modal interchange while minimising unit and clause B and D to H of Draft council will prioritise alternative kerbside amenity, traffic and environmental impacts. We London Plan policy T.6.1 detailed in uses (such as car club spaces, cycle recognise that the best location(s) may be beyond Appendix 2. parking and electric vehicle charge points) Westminster’s boundary. This approach is 2. 50% of these spaces should provide ahead of parking for private vehicles. consistent with the commitment in the London Plan active provision for electric charging and Mayor’s Transport Strategy that the Mayor vehicles while the remaining spaces E. For major developments contributions will will identify and deliver replacement coach station should incorporate a passive provision. also be required for on-street provision of facilities to provide easier access to the coach electric vehicle and other low emission network, while retaining good access to central B. In zones B & F where on-site parking is vehicle infrastructure. London for coach operators. delivered applicants will:

112 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

Parking F. Where sites are redeveloped existing treatments and gardens to provide vehicle 28.4 / The National Planning Policy Framework parking provision must be reduced to meet crossovers and on-site parking will be (NPPF) advises that local authorities should the parking standards in Appendix 2 unless resisted (where permitted development consider an area’s accessibility, type, mix and use there is site specific justification to rights do not exist). of development, availability of public transport, re-provide an element of the existing local car ownership levels and the need to reduce parking. On housing estate renewal H. Proposals for, or including, new public car the use of high-emission vehicles when setting schemes, parking provision may be parks (and other motor vehicle public local parking standards. retained or re-provided where it can be parking, including for coaches) will be demonstrated that: assessed against the objective of reducing 28.5 / Our approach to residential car parking motorised travel. 1. existing occupiers with established conforms to the London Plan principle of balancing parking spaces or permits are to return new development with the prevention of excessive to the site once the development is car parking that undermines cycling, walking, and 28.1 / The effective management of parking completed and that the retained or public transport use. In accordance with the NPPF, spaces will influence transport mode choice and re-provided parking is for those Appendix 2 sets out maximum parking standards, will be an important tool for improving health, residents only; and which take into account existing levels of car tackling congestion and local pollution in the city. ownership, existing on-street parking stress 2. there is evidence of adequate capacity levels,6 and the high level of public transport within the relevant controlled parking 28.2 / The management of parking spaces is provision in Westminster. The standards also zone if the re-provided parking is to be particularly important in an area like Westminster set out the requirements for electric vehicles on-street; and which, for the most part, has a dense and fine grain to encourage use of new technologies, minimum built environment where considerable pressure 3. the retained or re-provided parking requirements for cycle parking provision and on public space and in particular kerbside is delivered as part of an overall requirements for disabled and car club spaces. space exists. package of measures improving legibility, including walking and cycling 28.6 / Given the high levels of public transport 28.3 / By minimising parking provision, space for routes, and making improvements to provision and accessibility to jobs, leisure and other uses is released and facilitates better the public realm. shopping facilities in Westminster, we have taken integration with a new development scheme. This the view that new development should be in turn precipitates the more efficient use of land G. Proposals for the redevelopment of predominantly car free. Notwithstanding, there will which has a positive impact on the public realm existing car parks for alternative uses will always be a need to ensure that a lack of provision particularly in areas of kerbside stress and will be supported. The removal of boundary does not result in significant increases in demand benefit sustainable travel modes such as walking and cycling. 6 London Plan parking standards will apply in zones where PTAL levels are 3 and below

113 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Figure 24: Parking zones 24: B&F Figure CONNECTIONS 114

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

for on-street parking in the vicinity of the premium and exacerbated by parking stress tenure mix and proposed sustainable transport development, leading to increased congestion, levels. Less polluting travel modes such as measures, such as provision for cycling and disruption to traffic flow, air and noise pollution, electric charging points along with public realm car clubs. poor parking practices, and adverse impacts on improvements are challenging to deliver when the amenity of residents. To ensure this is the space is limited. 28.10 / It is expected that major schemes will be case, developments should not create or appropriate for dedicated parking provision in zones –– Air quality is one of the top concerns for exacerbate areas of parking stress. As a result, B & F. In these zones car parking spaces should be Westminster’s residents. If off street parking we will not allow the parking stress level in a local let on a short-term basis so that the usage of these is only allowed for a fraction of the predicted area to exceed the defined threshold of 80% of spaces and areas can be kept under review. Where growth in zones B and F, residents would need on-street parking spaces being occupied during car free development is stipulated in the policy, to travel and search for parking spaces due to the day or at night, in compliance with existing appropriate mitigation measures will be required, kerbside stress experienced in these zones. parking restrictions. such as the fully policy compliant delivery of –– A central principle of the emerging City Plan sustainable transport infrastructure to encourage 28.7 / As a result, we have developed a parking is to encourage mixed and sustainable a modal shift, including cycle parking, cycle hire policy approach which functions on two distinct communities and a demographic imbalance facilities and electric vehicle charging provision but interrelated levels. Firstly, we have an exists within Westminster in terms of the dependent on the location of the development. We overarching parking policy which covers most proportion of families living in the city. Cars advocate the letting rather than selling of car park of the city and follows emerging London Plan car provide a method of convenient transportation spaces to residents in new development on a short free standards and secondly, we have a localised and release from the stress of living in central term basis so that their use can be kept under review. policy specifically covering Parking Zones B & F. London. This is particularly relevant for young If under-used, this approach enables car parks to be families where the cost of public transport and converted into another use. 28.8 / The second strand of this policy allows the logistical implications of using these forms on-site parking under the conditions outlined of travel can be a prohibiting factor for many Car clubs and car sharing above. It is considered that this approach more families moving to and staying in Westminster. 28.11 / The use of car clubs can contribute to accurately reflects the particular characteristics and –– Zones B and F are separated from a reduced need for car ownership and hence future development plans inherent in these zones. Westminster’s main parks and areas of reduce parking stress, and as such they are The justification for a localised parking approach open space. encouraged. Where provision is made for car in these distinct zones is: clubs, they should provide a range of vehicle types –– The levels of parking stress are most acute in 28.9 / Transport assessments or statements for and sizes, including low emission and family sized and around the Paddington Opportunity Area proposed developments without parking provision vehicles. This can help broaden the appeal of where a significant portion of Westminster’s should explore the issue of parking stress and membership to a range of households. Doing so growth is targeted (Zones B). include an analysis of existing levels in the vicinity can improve take-up thus reduce demand for car and of anticipated levels of car ownership. They must ownership and parking stress. –– Kerbside space within Westminster is at a also take account of location, housing type and

115 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

On-street parking Therefore, in residents’ parking Zone B and F, 28.17 / There are some exceptions where the where on-street pressure is high and where high essential operational needs of the proposed use 28.12 / On-street parking is a limited resource levels of residential development are expected may require dedicated off-street parking. Such and demand can exceed supply in parts of the to take place the issuing of permits to residents uses include hospitals, medical centres, and the city, meaning that the loss of such space will not of new developments will be kept under review. key emergency services. In addition, hotels, normally be supported. On-street parking spaces leisure, entertainment, and education uses can can cater for a wide range of users including 28.15 / Given the increasing demand on kerbside increase demand for coaches, minibuses or taxis, residents, short stay (visitor) parking, and to space in the city, proposals seeking exclusive and parking facilities. Meeting the needs of these facilitate loading and servicing requirements at access to the kerbside through measures such as vehicles should be considered although parking various times of the day. Balancing these needs dedicated parking bays, permits or Parking Identifier should only be provided where it is needed for the requires careful management, and we will Boards for exclusive parking will be resisted. This essential operation of the use. therefore work with the full range of user groups will ensure the free-flow of vehicular traffic and allow to ensure their needs are met as far as possible. all users of the highway to access the kerbside in 28.18 / Housing Renewal schemes will be This could include reviewing existing parking compliance with existing restrictions. Exceptional expected to attain an overall reduction in zones and controls as circumstances change circumstances such as an overriding national car parking provision over time. over the Plan period. security, NHS or other emergency services needs, or where it can be demonstrated that any 28.13 / Our approach in recent years has been restrictions will not adversely impact on traffic to minimise the number of resident cars parked flow, highway safety or parking conditions, will be on-street, where on-street facilities are under considered on a case-by-case basis. If granted, pressure, by seeking off-street parking in new 29. Highway access and such concessions will be regularly reviewed. residential development to cater for those that management want or need to own a car. This allows residents Off-street parking A. Given the increasing demands on existing to own cars but does not necessarily encourage highway space, the council will resist the them to use them. Residents have also been able 28.16 / The creation of additional off-street public loss of highway land. In cases involving the to acquire a resident’s parking permit to park parking can undermine efforts to encourage use of setting back of buildings, the council will on-street, but only in the zone in which they live. more sustainable modes of transport, which is seek to ensure the resulting frontage land necessary to reduce congestion and improve air is designated as highway. 28.14 / The London Plan seeks to encourage quality and road safety. New parking provision for car-free residential development, but the London the public should therefore only be made where it B. New highway accesses should minimise Plan standards are not strictly car-free if residents is replacing existing off-street public parking, and the amount of kerb space lost for parking can acquire on-street parking permits. Issuing should include provision for disabled people’s and / or servicing and should ensure permits for developments that have no on-site parking, electric vehicle spaces as well as car club parking facilities would mean that the number spaces and cycle parking to encourage more of cars parked on-street is likely to increase. sustainable travel choices.

116 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

of kerb space for parking where this will lead to no loss of street furniture.7 necessary, particularly where it is in close increased congestion on local residential side roads. proximity to major tourist destinations and C. Development will only be allowed access transport hubs. The Strategic Road Network and onto the strategic road network where it Westminster’s Road Hierarchy can be demonstrated that: 29.4 / Westminster has a defined road hierarchy 1. there is no reasonable alternative setting out the different types of roads and their 29.1 / The road network plays a vital role in the to direct access; distinctive roles: life and work of Westminster, enabling trips by 2. the number of individual new access residents, businesses and visitors. It also enables –– Transport for London Road Network (TLRN) points will be minimised; public transport to deliver staff and customers to is considered most suitable for through traffic. businesses and provides for their servicing needs. 3. there is no adverse impact on the –– The Westminster Strategic Road Network All these demands mean that highway space in strategic road network including (WSRN) distributes traffic within Westminster Westminster is under particular stress and there impact on the local neighbourhood and to neighbouring boroughs. is a pressing need for a strategic approach to its network; management. –– Local Roads give priority to pedestrians and 4. the proposed access is not in close cyclists over motor traffic, providing access proximity to road junctions; and Loss of highway land to residential areas and local centres. 5. the provision of access does not 29.2 / The loss of highway land will not generally 29.5 / Direct vehicular access onto the strategic adversely affect the safety and free be acceptable, as reducing space on the highway parts of the network (TLRN and WSRN) from new flow of traffic and pedestrians, including for pedestrians and vehicles impedes movement development is likely to lead to increased through provision of adequate visibility and traffic flow, worsening congestion and congestion and compromise its function and splays. discouraging active transport modes such as therefore should be avoided wherever possible. walking and cycling. By designating frontage as D. New development likely to attract large When considering development proposals, this highway land where buildings are set back from visitor numbers should ensure that principle will be used to discourage traffic from the highway, we will be able to carry out proportionate provision is made for taxis, using unsuitable streets in order to minimise the improvements such as footway widening to coaches and other tourist vehicles, where negative impacts of traffic on local residents and encourage active travel opportunities and local amenity and to improve road safety. smooth pedestrian flows. 7 Street furniture is considered to be distinct from street Provision for taxis, coaches and New highway access clutter which is defined as unnecessary structures tourist vehicles such as signs, railings, street lighting, road markings 29.3 / Where new developments require vehicular and advertising hoardings. 29.6 / Developments that are likely to generate access to the highway, they should minimise the loss large visitor numbers or those in close proximity to

117 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Figure 25: Westminster’s Road 25: Hierarchy Figure CONNECTIONS 118

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

major tourist attractions or transport hubs should ensure that adequate space is made available for site and applicants will produce Delivery the transport and environmental impacts of taxis, coaches and other tourist vehicles, such as and Servicing Plans which encourage development construction must be sightseeing buses. This could include dedicated provision for low-emission, consolidation minimised and mitigated through parking, layovers, pick up and set down points, and last mile delivery modes. Constructions and Logistics Plans (CLPs) minicab offices, and taxi ranks. The benefits of incorporating adherence to the Construction provision should, however, be balanced against C. Provision for servicing, collection and and Logistics Community Safety Scheme the need to protect residential amenity (given deliveries within developments will be: (CLOCS) and the Freight Operator potential noise disturbance and impacts on air Recognition Scheme (FORS). On-site 1. located behind new or converted quality) and allow sufficient parking and circulation machinery and vehicles used should comply buildings, or below street level; space for other vehicles. with industry best-practice emission 2. appropriate in size, type and anticipated standards contributing to the council’s Unadopted Highways frequency of arrival of vehicles; and air quality objectives. 29.7 / To ensure consistency across Westminster 3. capable of being shared with in terms of quality of design, materials and other businesses. maintenance, housing estate roads which are not publicly adopted highways should accord D. Where it is not possible to fully meet the with the policies and standards in the City Plan. servicing, collection and delivery needs Freight within a development site they must be met 30.1 / Westminster has a high level of demand for in such a way that minimises adverse freight, servicing, delivery and collection services effects on other highway and public realm (including personal delivery and ‘click and collect’), users, and other residential or commercial that must be managed to allow residents to access activity. In this instance the council will seek 30. Freight and servicing the goods and services they need and to enable planning obligations in the form of a A. The council will strongly support the businesses to continue to grow. The high commuted sum for both the cost of provision of consolidated facilities for concentration of commercial activity interspersed implementation and maintenance of any freight, servicing and deliveries in new with residential development is a particular loading bay as well as the opportunity cost development in accordance with emerging characteristic of Westminster’s dense, historic of lost kerbside space. London Plan policy. The net loss of existing urban fabric. This is especially the case in the off-street facilities will be resisted. CAZ and the West End which creates particular E. For major developments where construction challenges for the movement, re-moding and related activities may lead to a significant B. Servicing, collection and delivery needs re-timing of freight, servicing and deliveries. impact on the surrounding public highway, should be fully met within a development

119 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

30.2 / Consequently, we support the West End for the last mile or consolidating loads are just a disturbance and environmental impact. We Partnership’s (WEP) Freight & Servicing Strategy couple of examples of how the last leg can be are keen to promote facilities of this kind. which seeks to go beyond the Mayor’s target by made in a more sustainable way. This stage of the reducing overall numbers of delivery and servicing delivery process should be informed by the Mayor Servicing vehicles in the West End by 10%, rising to 80% at of London’s Freight and Servicing Action Plan.9 30.7 / Servicing provision is essential to the peak visitor times where key public realm and viability of commercial developments in order to highway interventions are planned. 30.5 / New development can contribute to the facilitate the timely and practical delivery and pick management of freight traffic through the provision up of goods and for the maintenance and care of 30.3 / The re-timing of deliveries, collections and of sufficient, dedicated off-street space for the building. Servicing, including waste collection servicing to avoid the busiest times of the day will servicing, deliveries and collections particularly facilities, must be provided on-site and vehicles bring significant safety, environmental and social where multiple developments can share the same must be able to pull clear of the public highway benefits to residents, businesses and visitors. By facility so as to ensure the most efficient use is without causing obstruction, unless it is clearly spreading movements evenly throughout the day made of scarce space, where this does not demonstrated that it cannot be accommodated and reducing their noise impact, the efficiency and compromise businesses’ operational needs. This and adequate justification is provided for this. If road safety of on-street loading areas will be includes the provision of appropriately sized ground servicing is to be undertaken on street, it must be improved, through reducing collisions and floor holding areas for deliveries and refuse bins. demonstrated that it would not lead to adverse congestion. In addition, air quality improvements Such provision of off-street space takes delivery safety implications, for pedestrians and / or will occur as smoother traffic flow is enabled activity off the highway, avoiding obstructing other vehicles, or the obstruction of traffic. thereby freeing capacity on the road network road users, including pedestrians. It can also help to absorb more growth. minimise residents’ exposure to noise if such areas 30.8 / This is particularly important in mixed-use are underground or sited away from residential developments including residential uses where 30.4 / Delivery and Service Plans associated properties. This is more likely to enable the adequate areas for servicing must be designed with a development proposal should address the re-timing of deliveries to ‘shoulder hours’, or other in a way which does not conflict or cause adverse final stage in the movement of goods between times when residents’ amenity will be less affected. amenity impacts. Therefore, servicing should be a transport hub such as a distribution centre and integrated into the development at the early the end destination, commonly known as the ‘last 30.6 / The use of freight and micro-consolidation design formulation stages and not after the mile’.8 This stage of the delivery process should be facilities can also help to reduce the number of scheme has been designed. viewed as an important part of the supply chain vehicle movements and enable the use of lighter where significant environmental and efficiency vehicles or more sustainable options to make 30.9 / Cycle safety measures should be gains can be made. Utilising electric vehicles deliveries or carry out servicing that cause less included in construction logistics plans for new developments, particularly to provide safe routes 8 The ‘last mile’ delivery term does not imply a strict 9 Freight and servicing action plan measurement of distance but rather the last stage in the for cyclists during the construction period. delivery process from a transport node such as a distribution centre.

120 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

that operate on the highway. Nonetheless, 31. Technological ELECTRIC VEHICLE CHARGING FACILITIES the opportunities represented by technological change may sometimes have unintended negative C. The council will support the continued roll innovation in transport impacts in terms of amenity and the local out of on street electric charging points A. Technological innovation in transport environment, such as noise, street clutter and for use by the general public across designed to improve mobility, reduce on local character, as well as potential safety Westminster in line with the emerging congestion and improve air quality will be and security concerns. We will therefore work with Westminster Electric Vehicle Strategy (2019). supported where it does not compromise applicants and a range of stakeholders to avoid or highway safety and other amenity and mitigate any negative impacts and to ‘design in’ D. New development must incorporate environmental concerns. The council will facilities in new development where required. vehicle charging facilities with a high level work with applicants, infrastructure of active provision in line with the council’s providers and other stakeholders to Refuelling parking standards. minimise any negative impacts of these 31.3 / New fuel types will help reduce air pollution; new technologies. however, during the transition from fossil fuels traditional refuelling stations will remain essential, REFUELLING particularly in the first half of the Plan period. There 31.1 / Technological advances and innovations will B. Existing refuelling stations will be are limited such facilities within Westminster and a change the way people travel and the operation of protected, unless demonstrated to be lack of coverage could lead to unnecessary the transport network over the period of this plan. operationally unviable. Opportunities for detours for refuelling purposes, cause additional We will embrace the opportunities such changes new refuelling technologies, such as traffic and congestion, and undermine economic offer, whilst ensuring that the introduction of new hydrogen refuelling and electric vehicle competitiveness. We will therefore protect existing technologies do not compromise the safety or charging facilities, should be fully explored refuelling facilities in Westminster unless it is security of people living in, working in, or before a change of use is considered. New robustly demonstrated that the station is unused visiting Westminster. or replacement refuelling facilities will be or operationally unviable. directed to accessible locations on the 31.2 / New modes of travel will help to improve strategic road network. 31.4 / For refuelling sites identified as suitable for mobility by offering a wider choice of travel hydrogen refuelling, protection is justified by their options, including dockless cycle hire, electric scope to facilitate the more widespread use of scooter hire and autonomous vehicles. Other innovative energy technologies, in accordance technological changes will help to reduce with the London Plan. Where provided, alternative congestion by removing vehicles from the road, lower emission fuel and recharging points should particularly in terms of deliveries and collections. be in addition to, rather than instead of, traditional This includes the use of unmanned aircraft or refuelling facilities. Options for incorporating these ‘drones’, and other self-driving delivery vehicles

121 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS CONTENTS

facilities alongside traditional refuelling should be supported. This will enable people to continue to considered prior to any proposed change of use. take up electric vehicles, thereby helping improve DEVELOPMENT AFFECTING Westminster’s air quality. It is also important to WATERWAYS AND WATERBODIES 31.5 / Where redevelopment is proposed, ensure suitable fast-charge points in off-street C. Development that builds into or over refuelling stations should be re-provided, delivery / servicing bays for goods vehicles are waterways will only be acceptable if it preferably on-site, or in an appropriate location placed in appropriate locations, given the high is a water-related or water dependant use nearby where this is not possible, unless it can be volumes of freight, servicing and delivery traffic at appropriate locations.10 Transport clearly demonstrated that there are viable in Westminster. related structures, projects of strategic alternatives for refuelling already in the vicinity. importance to London, or major water New or replacement facilities will be directed to related infrastructure will be supported accessible locations on the strategic road network only where an overriding strategic (TLRN or WSRN). As these routes still include 32. Waterways and case for such development can be sensitive land uses, impact on local amenity will be demonstrated. considered through appraisals such as noise and waterbodies air quality assessments. A. Proposals alongside or affecting D. In assessing development proposals water should support the creation of a affecting Westminster’s waterways and Electric Vehicle Charging network of high-quality water spaces waterbodies, the council will have regard to which promotes biodiversity and the 31.6 / Fully electric and hybrid vehicles are the Thames River Basin Management Plan, use of Westminster’s waterways and becoming more prevalent on London’s roads and the Marine Policy Statement and the waterbodies for sport, leisure, Westminster has the highest number of new emerging South East Marine Plan. recreational and educational uses as plug-in vehicles being registered in London, with well as for water-based transportation. new registrations currently exceeding 1,000 per PIER FACILITIES quarter. Westminster currently has 153 off-street B. Development along waterways or adjacent E. Improvements to pier facilities electric vehicle charging bays, comprising 109 to waterbodies and within the Thames will be encouraged as part of new spaces and 44 car club bays. Many developments Policy Area must address their waterfront development along the River Thames. also provide off-street electric vehicle charging, location in terms of access Proposals for new or enlarged piers although usually for private use only. In addition to and design. Water-related and waterfront should improve accessibility for the wider roll out of on-street charging facilities enhancing uses will be encouraged and passengers, and not impact adversely accessible to the general public, where the loss of such existing uses resisted. on other land-side functions. developments propose new car parking, charging Access for pedestrians and cyclists will provision should be made in accordance with the be improved through enhancements standards set out in Appendix 2. Where proposed, to waterside towpaths and footpaths. a higher level of active provision of charging points 10 Appropriate locations are defined in Clause F than required by the parking standards will be

122 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

32.1 / Westminster’s blue infrastructure of access along the waterside. Water-related and MOORINGS waterways and waterbodies is of strategic waterfront enhancing uses are encouraged at importance to London and forms part of the waterside locations and at sites within the Thames F. Residential and commercial moorings and open space network that is essential to quality Policy Area11 in order to enrich the waterfront. facilities for boaters on Westminster’s of life in such a dense city. canals will be encouraged in appropriate 32.5 / If development detrimentally affects the locations as long as: 32.2 / The open aspect of Westminster’s usability and accessibility of the associated water 1. they do not negatively impact on waterways is important for several reasons. spaces, such as where there is an existing navigation, water quality, the openness They offer respite from the built-up nature of the riverside path or canal towpath, development and character of the water space city, supply important habitats for wildlife, and will facilitate the extension, widening, extension and the amenity of surrounding provide the setting for significant heritage assets. and improvement of these paths including the residents; The River Thames provides the setting for the provision of appropriate safety features. Palace of Westminster and other historic buildings, 2. will not hinder navigation; and and many of London’s most iconic views include 32.6 / Existing paths must not be removed, narrowed 3. they can be satisfactorily serviced by the Thames and the lakes in the Royal Parks. or otherwise adversely affected. Where no such utility services and the road network. paths exist, provision of these will be required, but 32.3 / Waterways and waterbodies are also they should not narrow the waterway by creating G. Proposals for permanent moorings on important for providing habitat and wildlife boardwalks or other solid overhanging projections. the River Thames will: corridors, providing for recreational activity Public access to existing riverside steps will be and public enjoyment, fulfilling environmental maintained and improved where necessary. 1. enhance the character and functions such as drainage, and in some cases appearance of the riverside and supporting sustainable transport. They therefore 32.7 / Development that encroaches over or into be open to the public; merit strong protection, and opportunities to waterways will normally be resisted due to impacts 2. not compromise views of the river, enhance their use are encouraged. on openness, unless it demonstrates overriding the World Heritage Site and other strategic benefits such as water quality improvements heritage assets and their settings; and Development affecting waterways (such as the Thames Tideway), enhanced flood and waterbodies defences, or increased river transportation. 3. not hinder navigation or jeopardise the long-term use of pier recesses. 32.4 / Where development proposals are adjacent to rivers or canals, buildings should orientate towards the water, and allow for continuous public

11 The Thames Policy Area is a London Plan tool for ensuring Planning co-ordination. The boundary of the Thames Policy Area has been informed by the London Plan maps encompassing the Westminster area.

123 CONTENTS infrastructure network 26:Figure Westminster’s blue infrastructure CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY CONNECTIONS 124

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 CONNECTIONS CONTENTS

32.8 / This approach means that as a matter of Pier facilities 32.11 / To manage these impacts, moorings principle we do not favour proposals for new river along the Thames should be restricted to uses 32.9 / Enhanced pier provision in the right crossings in Westminster. Any proposals for new that encourage public use of the river, rather than locations can help broaden the choice of or replacement crossings that do come forward private uses such as residential or offices. Uses transport modes and reduce congestion will be required to demonstrate that they meet a such as galleries, exhibition areas, or recreation elsewhere, particularly where it is well linked to robustly evidenced strategic transport need on and education will be supported in principle, public transport, pedestrian and cycle routes. a scale sufficient to outweigh the importance of although impact on the character of the river and Enhancements should be focused on improving protecting our waterways’ open character. Where the listed Embankment Wall (and impacts on the access to the water. Proposals located downstream a new bridge meets land it will make a positive setting of other listed buildings) may limit of Westminster Bridge should make use of the contribution to existing open space and the urban opportunities for ancillary structures such existing purpose-built pier recesses along the and environmental fabric such as conservation as ticket kiosks. Embankment Wall, where these are compatible areas and listed buildings and protected trees and with heritage and environmental concerns. parks. Where this need is evidenced, proposals 32.12 / To support the use of the city’s other should be designed for pedestrians and cyclists waterways, moorings and facilities for boaters are Moorings only, and link to the public transport network to supported in principle where they do not disrupt incentivise sustainable travel. Proposals should be 32.10 / A range of moored vessels and other main navigation routes. Likely suitable locations designed to respect the strategic importance of floating structures along the city’s waterways can include Paddington Basin, Little Venice, and the setting and ecological value of the Thames, add to Westminster’s diversity and vibrancy; Lisson Grove. the important character and amenity of however, the riverfront is a finite resource, and the surrounding residential areas, and reflect River Thames is a strategically important and aspirations to increase the use of the river iconic feature of London, as set out in the London by passengers and freight. Plan. Permanent moorings on the River Thames therefore need careful management to protect the character of the river, including its views and as part of the setting to important heritage assets, to protect its role as a continuous wildlife corridor and to avoid impeding river navigation.

125 CONTENTS an Air Quality Management Area, and reducing our CO reducing our and Area, Management Quality Air an designated been has Westminster decades two past the For continue to grow and prosper as ahealthy and resilient city. Tackling climate change head on is only way the we can Our environment is crucial to how we as acity. perform A healthy environment created by everyone, for everyone ENVIRONMENT we of give highest the people life. quality in our city footprint, measures to environmental lower taking our By fundamental. but desirable, isn’t just efficiency Energy we build. everything in consideration The urban island heat effect hascalled for even greater reduce and ease congestion us pollution. helping already is options greener travel and management emissions remains atop priority. Abold approach to traffic 2

CONTENTS CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY D. AIR QUALITY ASSESSMENTS C. B. POSITIVE AND NEUTRAL QUALITY AIR A. quality Air 33.

should be at least Air Quality Neutral. Neutral. Quality Air least at be should (CHP) Power and Heat Combined or boilers developments incorporating solid biomass All other major developments and status. Positive should achieve Quality Air Assessment to an Impact Environmental subject those and Areas Renewal Housing and Areas Major developments in Opportunity in areas. other quality ofair detriment without locally it improve to opportunities and maximise air quality to poor exposure to reduce development expects and city the in quality air toThe council improving is committed 3. 2. 1. for: required be will Assessments Quality Air

uses; sensitive Proposals incorporating technologies; combustion-based or uses generating air pollution Proposals include that potentially Major developments; and

environmental concernsenvironmental for our residents top is the among Westminster. quality Air in and economic environmental impacts health, detrimental significant causes 33.1 pollution /Air Large masterplanned developments in particular in particular developments Large masterplanned development Londonand Neutral in Plan. Draft the Positive Quality to Air approach the /We adopt 33.3 and Positive Neutral Quality Air (2019). Strategy Air Clean Government’s the in actions and ambitions the support will this (2013), Plan Action and Strategy Quality Air our in out set measures wider the Together with travel. and sustainable efficiency energy infrastructure, green our approaches to design and construction, through for instance plan, this in way integrated an in quality air poor to /We tackle seek 33.2 possible. as far as levels PM to reduce to work we are continuing Westminster, across are met (PM) Matter for EU While Standards. Particulate standards (WHO) Organisation Health World EU and current exceed city of the areas large in levels pollution Air Management Area for decades. (AQMA) nearly two Quality Air an declared been has city of the whole The for us. priority aparticular is it improving 1 Air Quality Manifesto (WCC), March 2018 March (WCC), Manifesto Quality Air 4. Air Quality Focus Areas. Focus Quality Air within residentialAll developments 1 and and

avoid unintended this consequence. encouraged to how assess development could us is to areas. with engagement other Early impacts air quality traffic-related push but quality couldimprove local air reductions traffic instance, For elsewhere. quality air on of improvements be to given impact the must 33.7 /Consideration minimised and mitigated. are being appropriately how impacts these demonstrate and by, caused development new be or on, to impact quality for air potential the identify should (AQAs) Assessments Quality /Air 33.6 Assessments Quality Air planning document. supplementary aforthcoming in out set be will process for this The process calculation and as a final intervention. considered be may quality air on development the of impact the to offset contributions financial exploited, havebeen status Neutral all /When measures to33.5 achieve Quality Air technologies onthese air quality. of impact potential to the due CHP and Boilers to developments incorporating Solid Biomass requirement also applies Neutral Quality The Air achieve an overall improvement to air quality. and are worse make encouraged to air quality should not major other developments /All 33.4 Positive. requirement for Quality Air policy the in reflected is which quality, air local to improve methods to include potential have the ENVIRONMENT

128

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 27: NO₂ Pollution and Air Quality Focus Areas

129 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

33.8 / Where AQAs show that emissions or exposure quality in these areas, developments incorporating should be reduced, this should be done on-site. new residential units in these areas will be required to 2. minimising noise from plant machinery Off-site measures to improve local air quality may submit an AQA to demonstrate air quality is not made and internal activities; be acceptable where it can be demonstrated that worse and where possible, improved. AQFAs and 3. minimising noise from servicing and on-site provision is impractical or inappropriate, their environments will be prioritised for air quality deliveries; and and equivalent air quality benefits to the local area offset projects, including those funded through will be achieved. contributions made in accordance with this policy. 4. protecting the relative tranquillity in and around open spaces. 33.9 / Development proposals that include potential air pollution generating uses or combustion based ODOUR technologies, could comprise, for example, those 34. Local environmental impacts D. Development will effectively address which generate extensive traffic such as from A. The council will make sure that quality of the adverse impact of odour through the deliveries or customer arrivals and departures, car life, health and welling and the natural incorporation of appropriate mitigation parking proposals or those which include CHP or environment are not adversely affected by measures using a precautionary approach. biomass boilers. Consideration must be given to how harmful pollutants and other negative these will be designed so as to not worsen local air impacts on the local environment. LAND CONTAMINATION quality to ensure their acceptability. LIGHT POLLUTION E. Applicants are required to carry out 33.10 / The exposure of poor air quality to vulnerable contaminated land assessments and take B. Developments must be designed to people is a particular concern which development appropriate remediation measures for minimise the detrimental impact of glare should reduce or avoid. Sensitive uses include many development on or near a site which is and light spill on local amenity, biodiversity, types of social and community infrastructure, potentially contaminated. highway and waterway users. including schools, hospitals and nursery facilities, as well as types of specialist housing such as CONSTRUCTION IMPACTS NOISE AND VIBRATION elderly housing and care homes. F. Developments are required to minimise C. Development should prevent adverse demolition and construction impact by 33.11 / There are eight Air Quality Focus Areas effects of noise and vibration and improve complying with Westminster’s Code of (AQFAs) in Westminster, which are designated by the the noise environment in compliance with Construction Practice (CoCP). Mayor of London.2 These areas not only exceed air the council’s Noise Thresholds, with quality limits but are also locations with high human particular attention to: G. Modern methods of demolition and exposure. Due to the existing poor air 1. minimising noise impacts and construction that minimise negative local preventing noise intrusion to residential environmental impacts will be encouraged. 2 The London Datastore provides the most up to date developments and sensitive uses; information on Air Quality Focus Areas in Westminster

130 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

34.1 / The many varied activities in Westminster leisure, sport and/or play facilities should follow that includes: plant machinery, internal activities, create a vibrant city, but in the wrong locations or at Sport England’s Artificial Lighting Guidance. It is amplified noise, transport (including servicing and the wrong time these activities can be of nuisance. also important to retain subtly-lit and dark spaces deliveries) and other noise generating activities. We aim to maintain high standards of life in the city to protect biodiversity from light spill – for instance and protect health and well-being, particularly along canals. The desire to minimise wasted 34.6 / Our Noise Strategy (2010-2015) sets out of vulnerable groups. We therefore seek to energy should also be considered. Where our overarching framework for controlling noise in the manage impacts that negatively affect the local relevant, we will require lighting assessments city. Our Noise Technical Guidance Note sets out the environment. We apply the Agent of Change to demonstrate compliance with this policy. Noise Thresholds developments are expected to principle which places the burden on the applicant meet and shows where existing tranquil spaces exist. to mitigate negative environmental impacts and Noise and vibration ensures development does not cause existing Odour 34.4 / People come to the city for work, culture, nearby uses from having to curtail their activities. education and entertainment, and noise and vibration 34.7 / Some uses and activities in Westminster are inevitable by-products of these activities. Some of will create odour, smells or fumes which can be 34.2 / A range of measures can improve the these activities are focused in areas, such as the sources of nuisance. It is important that activities quality of the local environment, including the Central Activities Zone, and as a result the noise that create odour do not impact on the amenity of management of land use, the design and location environment changes significantly across different surrounding buildings or the adjoining highway. of buildings, incorporation of green infrastructure, parts of the city. However, not all noise and vibration Where appropriate, we will require odour and management of transport infrastructure. can be attributed to city living and if uncontrolled, can assessments to make sure potential impacts are We will publish technical guidance that provides be of nuisance and severely impact on health and appropriately mitigated. Permitted development detail on the assessments, standards and other quality of life. Defra’s Noise Action Plan and our noise rights mean that some developments can requirements that should be met. data show that ambient noise levels in Westminster accommodate a wide range of uses without the are higher than national and regional averages. need for planning permission to change between Light Pollution We therefore not only seek to avoid adverse noise them. Proposals for such uses, such as hot food 34.3 / We seek to make sure artificial lighting uses impacts, but also reduce noise in the city. premises, will require mitigation measures to be the right light, in the right place and at the right incorporated to prevent unacceptable odour time. Lighting helps to keep our public realm 34.5 / Developments should ensure that any noise issues arising in the future. accessible, legible and safe after dark. Artificial and vibration impacts are mitigated. They should be lighting can also help to extend the use of sports constructed and operated to achieve appropriate Land contamination facilities for communities. We will use the relevant noise levels and ensure that any cumulative effects 34.8 / Developable land is scarce in Westminster, professional standards3 as a guide to assessing of new noise sources (for example additional plant which means that development will take place light impacts. Applications for physical activity, machinery or music) does not contribute to the existing on or adjacent to land that potentially may be background noise level. Careful consideration must be contaminated. In order to ensure that occupiers given to the design and location of schemes that could 3 E.g. standards set out by the Institute of or users are not exposed to health risks and Lighting Professionals impact or be impacted by noise from development

131 CONTENTS implemented where possible. should be emissions from construction and nuisance to reduce ofconstruction methods Innovative andresidents. affected community local the engage with and proactively communication, possible, to site good implement management and as much as impact construction the to mitigate adhere and contractors to. applicants We expect to need will firms construction and applicants that measures and standards the out sets (CoCP) Practice ofConstruction Code our take place, works building and demolition the whilst community and the To impacts. noise environment and dust the protect vibration, detrimental andrelated traffic additional in results often city the in activity /Development 34.9 impacts Construction measures. remediation proposed for any abasis as if and land to uses need required used be identified ofwatercourses the or waterbodies) history the is avoided (e.g. impact environmental on soil, CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY B. GREENING CITY A. infrastructure Green 35. contribute to the greening of Westminster ofWestminster greening to the contribute wherever will, possible,Developments social andenvironmental, economic value. its to maximise infrastructure green city’s The council and enhance protect will the

F. TO ACCESS NATURE AND BIODIVERSITY E. D. C. OPEN SPACE G.

uses. of and range should enhance quality their the Royal Parks Development affecting space deficiency. play or space ofopen areas in particularly play, for children’s space active and space open public improved or new provide to required be will developments Major protected. be will amenity and value,and ecological tranquillity spaces open All andquality, their heritage scheme. features and spaces into design of the the green other and gardens rain roofs, green walls, green trees, by incorporating SINCs network will be protected. be will network SINCs features ecological ofother the outside and habitats priority (SINCs), Conservation for Natural ofImportance Sites features to enhance biodiversity, areas of nature should include deficiency within Developments should be maximised. species for priority habitats create new and to habitats enhance existing Opportunities effectively be addressed by nature-based solutions, solutions, beaddressed by nature-based effectively often can effect island heat the and quality, air poor Challenges risk, suchasflood benefits. its maximise to network infrastructure green ofour out most the to get required is approach integrated /An 35.2 resilience. and ecological biodiversity education, and play, conservation, and heritage landscape leisure, recreation air quality,improving sport, and well-being, health climate adaptation, change include and are diverse bring assets blue that our green and and benefits The functions for wildlife and biodiversity. function an important provide many and designation, aheritage have spaces open city’s ofthe half Over increasing. is roofs and walls green as such assets green green space, number of and and range the other is of and open Westminster one quarter Almost 35.1 infrastructure. green /We ofour are proud I. H. TREES developments. canopy cover be encouraged in will new city’s the to optimise oftrees planting The protected. be will townscape and appearance ofcharacter the to the contribute which those and value historic and Trees ecological ofamenity, species and habitats. for priority particularly ENVIRONMENT

132

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 28: Open space and deficiencies

133 CONTENTS open spacesopen be secured will legal agreement. via our spaces. open Public access owned to privately of to quality improve and the accessibility partners us and our to work with encourage applicants We disabilities. physical with and people users accessible for or inclusive publicly wheelchair not all of /Currently our spaces open 35.4 are spaceOpen development. ofthe lifetime the relevant green spaces and features are in place for formanagement and maintenance arrangements should ensure appropriate Applicants and trees. systems drainage vegetated sustainable grassland, planting, gardens, rain walls, and roofs green include of greening Examples measures development. the of context and scale type, specific the on depend will suitable be will that ofmeasures scale and type The city. ofthe greening further to the contribute to opportunities have developments /All 35.3 greening City policy. ofthis application the on document planning Strategy. We also prepare will a supplementary be set in our out emerging Infrastructure Green will detail on our approach to green infrastructure Further network. enhance our green infrastructure to partners howdescribes we work will with (2019) in Westminster’ Spaces and Biodiversity ‘A to Approach Open strategy Our Partnership network. infrastructure green the into integrated fully when benefits wider bring which can CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY for children and young people. future developments provide sufficientopportunities that ensure not we do if increase will which city the in space play of adeficiency is 35.7 /There functions. other amongst and recreation amenity to nature conservation, contribution make apositive can appropriately and when developedinfrastructure and managed element of ourspaces green are an important new development should be explored. These ‘small spaces’ open and ‘pocket parks’ through byfocussed spaces ofopen supply the to increase opportunity every deficiency space ofopen areas spaces therethe isIn an city. in overall deficiency open number of /Despite the high-quality 35.6 event. the following space open and differentvalues the of restore function the to remediated fully be should land the space, open on events oftemporary case the In space. of open the safeguardspaces must functions the Development adjacent to or underneath open enhancing values of space. open the the to maintaining or ancillary and clearly essential be must space open on /Development 35.5 4 quantum of play space in accordance with the Mayor Mayor the with accordance in space ofplay quantum residentialMajor development should provide the carers. and parents their as well as city the in people for ofcaters needs all the children and young that space play active and accessible to providing

See emerging Playing Pitch and Facilities Built Strategies 4 We are committed committed We are

to nature - bringing nature to residents’ doorstep. to residents’ nature -bringing to nature access to improve opportunities to take all expected be will Development city. the in deficiency nature of areas significant are still there ofSINCs, number city. in large Despite the the enhance biodiversity to opportunities all to utilise important is 35.10 /It tofor access and visitors residents nature. possible make it and ofspecies for arange habitats provide important andSINCs significance. national importance haveregional which SINCs, Metropolitan This includes eighteen hectares. more 3,000 than for account which city, the in (SINCs) Conservation for Natural ofImportance Sites are 33 /There 35.9 to nature access and Biodiversity and enhance for value bring they the London. of Royal the character open the Parks to preserve applicants and partners with work We will city. the of character ofthe part are avital and space open ofWestminster’s to 90% close constitute Parks Royal The land. belt green as protection same the afforded are therefore and (MOL) Land Open and St James’s are Park) designated Metropolitan Kensington Park Hyde Park, Green Park, Gardens, (Regent’s city the in Parks Royal five /The 35.8 replacement document. subsequent any (2012) or SPG Recreation Informal of London’s Plan and Shaping Neighbourhoods ENVIRONMENT 134

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 29: Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation

135 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS CONTENTS

35.11 / Development should aim to create 35.14 / Proposals for new trees should have regard net gains in biodiversity, leaving the natural to the wider context, consider their contribution to Zone 2 they will be required to pass environment in a better state than before. There biodiversity and follow the guidance in our Trees the Exception Test and should as far are a growing number of tools and good practice and the Public Realm SPD (2011) or any as possible be located outside of the guides available which can help developments replacement document. All tree planting strategies Surface Water Flood Risk Hotspots. achieve measurable biodiversity net gain. should be submitted as part of a landscaping, tree or biodiversity strategy. D. Proposals for Essential Infrastructure and 35.12 / Developments impacting on biodiversity More Vulnerable Uses within Flood Zone 3 should follow the Mayor of London’s mitigation will be required to pass the Exception Test. hierarchy of avoid, minimise and compensate. Within the Rapid Inundation Zone, basement The emerging Green Infrastructure Strategy and 36. Flood risk dwellings and basement extensions to a supplementary planning document will set out A. All developments should be safe for their existing dwellings will not be acceptable. additional information on how biodiversity can be lifetime from the risk of flooding, complying protected and enhanced, including for priority with the council’s Strategic Flood Risk E. More Vulnerable Uses should, as far as habitats and species. Assessment (SFRA), Surface Water possible, be directed away from Surface Management Plan (SWMP), Local Flood Water Flood Risk Hotspots. Trees Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) and the Mayor of London’s Regional Flood F. A Flood Warning and Evacuation Plan 35.13 / Westminster’s trees, whether on the Risk Appraisal (RFRA). will generally be required for More streets, in parks, public open spaces or in private Vulnerable Uses within the areas at risk of gardens make a significant contribution to London’s B. A site-specific Flood Risk Assessment tidal breach flooding, especially if the land reputation as one of the world’s greatest cities. (FRA) must be submitted for: use is within the Rapid Inundation Zone. They are an integral and historic component of Westminster’s townscape and bring an enormous 1. developments of 1 hectare or greater; FLOOD MANAGEMENT INFRASTRUCTURE amenity value. Trees provide additional functions as vital parts of the green infrastructure network: 2. all developments in Flood Zones 2 G. All existing flood management trees shade buildings and streets, provide a and 3; and infrastructure will be protected, including drainage function, form green corridors and access for maintenance. 3. all developments within a contribute to tackling poor air quality. Many trees Surface Water Flood Risk Hotspot. also provide a heritage function as an integral part H. Improvements to flood defences will be of historic townscapes and landscapes. Their loss secured through planning conditions and / VULNERABLE USES should therefore be prevented.5 or legal agreements where the size, type C. Highly Vulnerable Uses will not be and / or location of development impacts allowed within Flood Zone 3; in Flood on flood risk. 5 See emerging Playing Pitch and Built Facilities Strategies

136 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Vulnerable uses and the recommendations of the TE2100 Plan SUSTAINABLE DRAINAGE are implemented. We will also continue to work 36.4 / Development should be steered to the areas with partners to support the timely implementation I. New development must incorporate with the lowest probability of flooding, as set out in of the Thames Tideway Tunnel including the Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) to the National Planning Policy Framework (NPPF). combined sewer outflows in the city. alleviate and manage surface water flood Given the dense built-up nature of Westminster, it risk. Development should aim to achieve will not be possible to direct all development outside Sustainable drainage greenfield run-off rates and demonstrate of the Flood Zones and Surface Water Flood Risk how all opportunities to minimise site Hotspots. Depending on vulnerability, some 36.7 / Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) run-off have been taken. developments within Flood Zone 2 and 3 will incorporate a range of measures which help drain therefore be required to satisfy the Exception surface water, reduce pollution of water entering Test set out in the NPPF. This approach gives the watercourse, reduce surface water flooding consideration to the type of development, as some and attenuate surface water run off. Examples 36.1 / As our climate changes the risk of flooding in uses are more vulnerable to the impacts of flooding of SuDS include permeable paving, green / blue the city increases. Sources of flood risk include tidal than others. The approach to vulnerable uses is roofs and rainwater harvesting systems. flooding (from the Thames), sewer flooding (foul derived from the SFRA. water from the sewer system) and surface water 36.8 / SuDS can be a multifunctional asset to flooding. Increased levels of development have the Flood management infrastructure the city, not only helping to reduce flood risk potential to increase risks of surface water flooding. from surface water flooding but also provide 36.5 / Besides the Thames Barrier, Westminster is However, redevelopment provides the opportunity an ecological value and improve air quality and protected from tidal and fluvial flooding by Thames to reduce flood risk by the incorporation of flood amenity while increasing resilience to climate Tidal Flood Defences including the Embankment resilience and resistance and drainage measures. change. Our canals can also play a role in wall. We will protect flood management managing surface water drainage from adjacent infrastructure to ensure the risk of flooding is 36.2 / With the Strategic Flood Risk Assessment development. Engagement with the Canal & River minimised. Access to defences for maintenance (SFRA), Surface Water Management Plan (SWMP), Trust is encouraged for development adjacent and emergency purposes must be retained, and Local Flood Risk Management Strategy (LFRMS) to canals to explore opportunities. their improvement will be sought as a condition and the Mayor of London’s Regional Flood Risk or via legal agreement where appropriate. Appraisal (RFRA), we have a strong framework 36.9 / A Sustainable Drainage Strategy should in place to manage flood risk in the city that be submitted with major developments and 36.6 / The Thames Estuary 2100 Plan (TE2100) is applicants should comply with. when advised by us, setting out how SuDS will be the strategic flood management plan for London incorporated into the development and how peak and the Thames Estuary. Its primary focus is tidal 36.3 / Our requirements for site-specific Flood Risk flow volumes will be reduced. Where it is not flooding, and Westminster is located in the London Assessments (FRAs) are aligned with the SFRA. possible to deliver greenfield run-off rates, City Zone. We will work with our partners to make Proposals should be accompanied by a signed applicants should demonstrate how all opportunities sure the Thames Flood Defences remain strong Flood Risk and Sustainable Drainage pro forma.

137 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY Figure 30: Flood Zones 30: Figure ENVIRONMENT 138

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

to minimise site run-off have been taken to get it as 37.2 / We recognise that a large portion of close to greenfield standard as possible. Applicants HEAT NETWORKS Westminster’s carbon emissions are produced should follow the Mayor of London’s drainage by existing buildings. We will therefore support D. Developments should be designed in hierarchy and set out the proposed SuDS proposals that seek to sensitively refurbish or accordance with the Mayor of London’s maintenance schedule in the strategy. retrospectively improve the performance of heating hierarchy. Major developments current buildings to reduce their energy use and must connect to existing or planned local improve comfort. Interventions to upgrade historic heat networks, or establish a new network, 37. Energy buildings will be undertaken sensitively in wherever feasible. recognition of their heritage value. OVERHEATING A. The council will promote zero carbon 37.3 / The challenge of zero carbon development development and expects all development to E. All developments should be designed and will be achieved through a range of measures and reduce on-site energy demand and maximise operated to minimise the risk of internal taking advantage of technical innovation. We will the use of low carbon energy sources to overheating. Major development proposals work with applicants, industry and local and regional minimise the effects of climate change. will include a cooling strategy in line with the partners to share knowledge in achieving this target Mayor of London’s cooling hierarchy. and we will prepare a supplementary planning CARBON REDUCTION document to share best practice and draw attention to successful approaches to dealing with these B. All development proposals should follow issues in Westminster’s unique circumstances. We the principles of the Mayor of London’s expect major developments to install appropriate energy hierarchy. Major development energy monitoring equipment to demonstrate should demonstrate through an energy 37.1 / We recognise that the level of growth in on-going effective energy monitoring and strategy how the carbon reduction targets the city will have a cumulative impact on energy management over the lifetime of the development set out in local policy or the London Plan, demand and associated carbon emissions. in accordance with London Plan policy. whichever is the greatest, can be achieved. It is essential that developments utilise every opportunity to reduce emissions now to limit the Carbon reduction C. Where it is clearly demonstrated that it is extent of future climate change. Our priority is not financially or technically viable to for new developments to achieve zero carbon 37.4 / The Mayor of London’s energy hierarchy achieve zero-carbon on-site, any shortfall emissions from all regulated uses (i.e. space sets out the criteria to maximise the sustainability in carbon reduction targets should be heating, lighting, hot water and ventilation) and and efficiency of energy systems in developments. addressed via off-site measures or through explore routes towards zero carbon across the Carbon emissions can be reduced via a range of the provision of a carbon offset payment development life-cycle, to avoid a legacy of measures, including the design and orientation of secured by legal agreement. emissions to be addressed in the future. buildings, incorporation of green infrastructure, use of light and sustainable materials, as well as

139 CONTENTS be set out in a supplementary planning document. be set in a out supplementary be calculated will and administered will contribution Fund Offset Carbon Westminster the ofhow Details measures. financial and ofphysical a combination the carbon reduction figure,itis when especially reduction carbon the to achieve are going they how to discuss process advice pre-application the through us with engage 37.6 encouraged to are strongly /Applicants in Westminster. reduce will that emissionselsewhere carbon projects to allocated be then will funding offset Carbon appropriate. where ofcarbon, cost local the reflecting (2014) SPG Construction and Design London Plan and Mayor of London’s Sustainable in the outlined accordance methodology the with in payment, lieu in cash via a shortfall their to offset need will onsite policy in out set targets carbon the to achieve are unable that 37.5 /Developments application. planning of the submission to the prior process pre-application proposal their in should discuss our applicants or incorporate new and emerging technologies, / and methods construction standard utilise not do projects retrofitting and developments Where systems. and efficient energy lighting cooling heating, as such measures active CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

buildings overbuildings a larger area an via underground to be distributed can energy Decentralised be wasted. generated heat would that otherwise utilising by efficiencies increasing ofuse, point the 37.7 generates energy power /Decentralised at networks Energy Figure 31. Energy hierarchy 31. Figure Be lean: energy use less energy efficiently energy Be clean: supply supply clean: Be Be green: use use green: Be renewable energy Offset Zero carbon target Zero carbon reduction carbon site 35% on target efficiency Energy viable energy solution for new developments. for new solution energy viable Westminster, provide can a heat networks as such demand, heat and density of high areas In equipment. heating to individual have for buildings need the avoiding ofpipes, network Building RegulationsBuilding baseline

ENVIRONMENT

140

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 32: District energy centres and networks

141 CONTENTS shading and use of green infrastructure. ofgreen use and shading to solar overheating e.g. mitigate orientation, measures low-energy and prioritise strategy cooling of the as part temperature modelling internal perform should Applicants effects. health to detrimental lead can this as overheated are not which buildings occupy city the in work and live who all that to We ensure want changes. to to climate is future central adapting overheating ofabuilding risk the manage that measures design passive and energy low 37.10 /Incorporating Overheating policy. ofthis requirements the meeting in applicants to assist document planning asupplementary publish we will addition, In context. current and the policy opportunities network future reflect to better document this review We will areas for future development. network opportunity and the city in energy the of decentralised explores technical the potential (DEM) Westminster 37.9 for Energy Masterplan /The Decentralised Brent. in Kilburn to South border city the across and Street Church Basin, Paddington Soho, Street, ofOxford east Victoria, including locations in networks expanded or new for and there is (PDHU) opportunity Undertaking Heat District Pimlico the at networks heat first UK’s ofthe one contains 37.8 /Westminster CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

commercial waste in the capital. the in waste commercial of level highest the we produce of London centre commercial the ofbeing aresult As week. per million one than to more up add collections per year. Commercial and waste household ofwaste tonnes 180,000 than more produces to a circulartransitioning economy. Westminster also is which city, for agrowing challenges greatest ofthe one is management 38.1 /Waste C. B. A. Waste management 38. shown on Figure 33 will be protected. be will 33 Figure on shown management facilities waste Existing on-site. facilities provide appropriate management waste to are required waste catering commercial /or and medical hazardous, produce that Major developments and developments use.future for current and projected capacity sufficientdeposit with and collection, for to access convenient are safe and which streams waste ofseparate storage provide appropriatefor facilities the must ofuse) change and extensions (including new developments All

and recycling in the city. in the and recycling reduction waste on is focus strategic /Our 38.2 efficiently in the city. the in Recent evidenceefficiently and appropriately managed is waste that ensuring provided on-site. should be to types waste managefacilities these appropriate ofwaste, types specialist generate approach Where uses to management. waste specific area an demand that locations in required be may area an in offacilities amalgamation The scheme. ofthe design the into integrated are that management fully facilities waste should provide adequate /Developments 38.3 planning waste duties. our strategic to meet Plan London bythe set apportionments waste the to pool to make arrangements boroughs London and other partners local workwill with We Westminster. in sites for new opportunities research and to monitor continue we will and management facilities waste existing protect and we therefore management will facilities waste strategic for new capacity no has Westminster that 7 6 Waste Evidence Base, 2018 Base, Evidence Waste –2031) (2016 Strategy Management Waste Municipal 6 We are committed to We are committed ENVIRONMENT 7 has shown shown has

142

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 ENVIRONMENT CONTENTS

Figure 33: Waste management facilities

143 CONTENTS we improve of life quality the for everyone. placingBy of people the design the at heart the process, living. urban sustainable, in best very the exemplifies brilliantly to come. that Design generations Designin it. that adds to our heritage and character for of those well-being and health the but environment, our to enhance just not strives that Design people-centred. only design the us, For that works is design that’s hasbut to work for everyone. that meansIt’s different acity things to different people, of business. heart contemporary the with to shoulder shoulder of London stands heart historic AplaceWestminster of contrasts. where is acity the life for design A HERITAGE AND DESIGN

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

39. Design principles PEOPLE-CENTRED DESIGN E. Applicants will demonstrate how sustainable design principles and A. New development will incorporate C. All development will place people at measures have been incorporated exemplary standards of high quality, the heart of design, creating inclusive into designs, utilising environmental sustainable and inclusive urban design and accessible spaces and places, performance standards as follows: and architecture befitting Westminster’s introducing measures that reduce the world-class status, environment and opportunity for crime and anti-social 1. Non-domestic developments of 500 sq heritage and its diverse range of locally behaviour, promoting health, well-being m of floorspace or above will achieve at distinctive neighbourhoods. and active lifestyles through design and least BREEAM “Excellent” or ensuring a good standard of amenity equivalent standard. RESPONDING TO WESTMINSTER’S CONTEXT for new and existing occupiers. 2. Conversions and extensions of 500 sq B. All development will positively contribute to m of residential floorspace or above, SUSTAINABLE DESIGN Westminster’s townscape and streetscape, or five or more dwellings will aim to having regard to: D. Development will enable the extended achieve “Excellent” in BREEAM lifetime of buildings and spaces and respond domestic refurbishment. 1. the character and appearance of the to the likely risks and consequences of existing area, adjacent buildings and climate change by incorporating principles PROMOTING EXCELLENCE IN heritage assets, the spaces around and of sustainable design, including: CONTEMPORARY DESIGN between them and the pattern and grain of existing streets, squares, mews and 1. use of high-quality durable materials F. Imaginative approaches to passageways; and detail; contemporary architecture and use of innovative modern building techniques 2. materials, building lines, scale, 2. providing flexible, high quality and materials will be encouraged where orientation, access, definition, surface floorspace; they result in exemplary new buildings treatment, height and massing; 3. optimising resource efficiency; and public realm which incorporate the 3. the form, character and ecological highest standards of environmental 4. enabling the incorporation of, or value of parks, gardens and other sustainability, that respect and enhance connection to, future services or open spaces; their surroundings and are integrated facilities; and with and better reveal Westminster’s 4. Westminster’s waterways and 5. minimising the need for plant and heritage and existing townscape. waterbodies; and machinery. 5. the preservation and enhancement of the surrounding tree population.

146 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

39.1 / Central to delivering the right kind of 39.5 / Applicants should demonstrate that design Design Guidance for further information on growth that underpins this plan is ensuring that proposals are based on a thorough analysis and the principles of Active Design.1 new development embodies the highest quality understanding of the site, its setting, context and of design that will deliver sustainable development character, taking account of the qualities of the Buildings and the spaces which adjoin and a successful future for our city. built and natural environment, streetscape, open them should be fully accessible and inclusive spaces, trees, green infrastructure and canal and for all, including people of all ages and those 39.2 / Given the exceptional quality of riverside settings. This analysis should include with mobility and sensory impairment or other Westminster’s built environment, it is essential to the area’s physical form, its morphological and health concerns or disabilities. In addition to ensure equally high-quality architecture and urban historical development, its uses, the nature and physical access to buildings and places, this will design in all new developments. Westminster’s quality of the public realm, the relationship include improving wayfinding, to making the public unique built environment, spacious parks and river between different parts of the city and the realm easier, more pleasant and safe. Access to frontage are known throughout the world and patterns of movement and activities. existing buildings, especially historic buildings, include some of central London’s best loved may present additional challenges, but there will historic areas, buildings and landmarks, as People-centred design almost always be scope to make improvements. In well as lesser known residential areas; most some locations this may not just be about physical 39.6 / We promote a city that works for everyone, are characterised by their human scale. These access but should also consider the ways in which a city for all. Placing people at the heart of the qualities underpin the city’s attractiveness as services and information can be managed and design process means that the users of the a place to live, work and visit and contribute to provided to meet the needs of all users. In all buildings and spaces are considered throughout a high quality of life for everyone. cases, applicants will be required to demonstrate all design stages. We encourage applicants that access provision has been considered to engage with local communities early in the 39.3 / We will prepare supplementary guidance effectively. design process and will support collaborative on the application of this and other design policies. and participatory design approaches. 39.8 / Well-designed environments can help to Responding to Westminster’s context minimise the opportunities for crime, anti-social 39.7 / Architecture and urban design can help behaviour and reduce the fear of crime. New 39.4 / Design should always respond to promote good physical and mental health by developments should make every effort to local context and distinctiveness, including creating streets, spaces and buildings which contribute to increasing safety and security in Westminster’s differing roles as a place to live, allow and encourage healthy lifestyles and take the built environment through proactive design the heart of national life and government, as a into account the amenity of occupiers, considering solutions to reduce crime and anti-social business and commercial centre and a tourist issues such as noise, access to open space behaviour (including counter-terrorism measures) destination. It should show how it will improve and air quality. Applicants should consider how providing active frontages, avoiding recesses, the quality of existing residential neighbourhoods development will contribute to improving health and, where appropriate, provide a successful and well-being and refer to Sport England’s Active foundation for new communities. 1 Active Design Guidance, Sport England

147 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

promoting natural surveillance and defining private or recycling of resources and material and and public space to ensure a clear sense of minimise energy use and emissions that 40. Westminster’s heritage ownership and responsibility. These should be contribute to climate change. A. Westminster’s unique historic environment integral to the design from the outset or where will be valued and celebrated for its added to existing buildings, must be sensitively 39.11 / Connectivity to future services can contribution to the quality of life and designed and sited. include digital networks and sustainable energy character of the city. Public enjoyment of, or district energy networks. Connection to nearby access to and awareness of the city’s Sustainable design energy networks or shared provision for plant heritage will be promoted. and machinery should be explored to maximise 39.9 / We want to encourage durable buildings efficiencies and minimise the need for new plant. to leave our generations’ mark for generations to B. Development must optimise the positive Finally, consideration should be given to how come. Applicants should demonstrate that they role of the historic environment in buildings and spaces will be managed by either have taken into account principles of sustainable Westminster’s townscape, economy private or public owners and managers, to sure design and that measures to improve and character and will: they remain of high quality over the lifetime of environmental performance and mitigate and the development. 1. ensure heritage assets and their adapt to climate change have been integrated settings are conserved and enhanced, into the design. This may include strategic design 39.12 / BREEAM (Building Research as appropriate to their significance; considerations, such as the orientation of buildings Establishment’s Environmental Assessment and spaces, design of façades to capitalise on 2. secure the conservation and continued Method) is the most commonly used methodology solar gain, whilst minimising risks of overheating beneficial use of heritage assets for assessing, rating and certifying the sustainable and other measures, for example incorporation through their retention and sensitive design and construction of buildings. Applicants of green infrastructure and flood resilience adaptation which will avoid harm will demonstrate how they will meet BREEAM or measures. Excellence in design quality and to their significance, while allowing equivalent standards set out above. floorspace adaptability should support the them to meet changing needs; lifespan of buildings. Promoting excellence in contemporary design 3. place heritage at the heart of place making and good growth, 39.10 / As new developments are large consumers 39.13 / We welcome creative approaches to maintaining the unique character of of resources and materials the possibility of contemporary, high quality architecture and our heritage assets and delivering sensitively refurbishing or retrofitting buildings state of the art building technology in appropriate high quality new buildings and spaces should also be considered prior to demolition locations, optimising densities and making the which enhance their settings. and proposals for substantial demolition and most of the opportunities they present to reconstruction should be fully justified on the basis celebrate, enhance and reveal the existing of whole-life carbon impact, resource and energy built and historic environment. use, when compared to the existing building. All development should ensure the reduction, reuse

148 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

WESTMINSTER WORLD HERITAGE SITE H. Changes of use to listed buildings will result in a high quality building which will be consistent with their long-term will improve their appearance in the C. The Outstanding Universal Value conservation and help to restore, retain context of the conservation area and (OUV), authenticity and integrity of the and maintain buildings, particularly those their environmental performance. Westminster World Heritage Site will be which have been identified as at risk. conserved and enhanced. The setting of M. The contribution of existing uses to the the site will be protected and managed I. Development within the settings or character, function and appearance of to support and enhance its OUV. affecting views of listed buildings conservation areas will be considered will take opportunities to enhance or and changes of use supported where D. Development will protect the silhouettes better reveal their significance. they make a positive contribution to of the Palace of Westminster and conservation areas and their settings. Westminster Abbey and will protect and J. Demolition of listed buildings will be enhance significant views out of, across regarded as substantial harm and will be ARCHAEOLOGY and towards the World Heritage Site. resisted in all but exceptional circumstances. N. Westminster’s Scheduled Monuments E. The council will work with partners to and their settings will be preserved, CONSERVATION AREAS promote the use, management and and opportunities taken to interpretation of the site in ways that protect, K. Development will preserve or enhance the enhance and communicate their enhance and better communicate its OUV. character and appearance of conservation significance, where appropriate. areas and protect their settings. Features F. Applicants will be required to demonstrate that contribute positively to the significance O. Applicants for development which that any impacts of their proposals on of conservation areas will be retained involves excavation or ground works in the World Heritage Site or its setting and opportunities taken to enhance them Westminster’s Archaeological Priority have been fully assessed using Heritage and their settings, wherever possible. Areas or other areas suspected of having Impact Assessment methodology. archaeological potential will demonstrate L. There will be a presumption that unlisted that they have properly evaluated the LISTED BUILDINGS buildings that make a positive contribution archaeological potential and significance to a conservation area will be conserved, of the site and assessed and planned G. Works to listed buildings will preserve unless it has been demonstrated that for any archaeological implications their special interest, relating sensitively the relevant tests in national policy of proposals. to the period and architectural detail of have been met. Buildings which make the original building and protecting or, a negative or neutral contribution may P. Archaeological deposits will be preserved where appropriate, restoring original be replaced or refurbished where this in situ wherever possible. Where it has detail and significant historic fabric.

149 CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY R. NON-DESIGNATED HERITAGE ASSETS Q. HISTORIC PARKS AND GARDENS the benefit of the propose of benefit the and asset ofthe loss or harm ofany scale be made will regardingjudgement the a balanced assets, heritage non-designated proposals affecting assessing When areas) be conserved. will conservation spacesopen and outside of interest within and archaeology of buildings merit, local (including assets heritage Non-designated from and towards spaces. these views significant and settings their and appearance,character and protect integrity, safeguardwill historic their gardens and spaces open parks, historic Westminster’s Proposals affecting appropriate. where interpretation, and display public including required, be will archiving and of publication level appropriate an and recording be of significance,full lesser investigation, are considered or deposits impossible to is situ in remains of archaeological conservation the that demonstrated been d development.

and environmental performance. Proposals for performance. and environmental facilities to environment and upgrade historic the access improve to solutions sensitive to find scope be There always changing also needs. almost will to meet to adapt need also assets heritage future, climate to but change haveagainst a sustainable fight the in help can stock building historic our of reuse and regeneration retention, /The 40.3 of proposals. andscale potential impact the and significance asset’s to the proportionate should be submitted Information assets. heritage requiredusually where development affect will is statement ofcircumstances case. A the heritage the and benefits) heritage include may (which benefits public any considered, been have which alternatives substantial), or than less substantial (whether caused ofharm degree the designation, its asset, the of significance the account into taking justification, full require will harm Any avoided. harm toinstance, significance beshould their first the In and understood. assessed fully been have ofproposals impact and assets heritage should ensure significance of the /Applicants 40.2 significance. to its appropriate ways in refurbished and maintained, environment is valued, historic the that vital is it city, ofour oflife quality and economy to character, the immense contribution its Given importance. international and are ofnational which of many assets, heritage ofits importance and concentration the from part large in derives city ofthe character unique The assets. greatest of its 40.1 environment is one historic /Westminster’s

2 methodology set out byICOMOS. out set methodology using the Assessment Impact a Heritage and nature of should include proposals this consideredbeen scale on and the depending have impacts to demonstrate provided be reveal OUV. its information should Sufficient enhance conserve, orproposals will better should demonstrate applicants setting, or its site the affect will development /Where 40.5 planning process. the in possible weight maximum and protection oflevel highest the afforded be must and ofsignificance level highest ofthe is it importance, asset ofdesignated international heritage a As Value (OUV). Universal Outstanding its recognises Site Heritage aWorld as Church, Abbey,and Westminster including St Margaret’s of Palace /The inscription the 40.4 of Westminster Westminster World Heritage Site enhance significance. their they where buildings ofhistoric upgrading the We encourage will creative design approaches to England’s council’s guidance. and the Retrofitting Historic in out set advice and design visibility, siting, construction, historic traditional fabric, on to impacts regard having compromised, not ensurestheirthat significance is and specification and tailoredwhere approach a to sensitive design supported be only will buildings historic retrofitting

World Heritage Properties, ICOMOS, 2011 ICOMOS, Properties, Heritage World for Cultural Assessments Impact Guidance on Heritage 2 Applicants Applicants DESIGN 150

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 34: Westminster World Heritage Site

151 CONTENTS will continue to work to protect views towards towards views to protect to work continue will We it. affect can ofWestminster, City the outside including at development distance, some that means prominence location and riverside Value. site’s The Universal Outstanding of its Abbey contribute significantly to an understanding of Palace the and of Westminster Westminster views iconic and silhouettes 40.7 striking /The setting. its and site ofthe management sustainable long-term akey is for the tool which site, for the groupsteering to update management plan the the with are working and site the within buildings key ofthe protection the to ensure Abbey for Palace the and of Westminster Westminster management plans of conservation production support We will possible. where initiated and experienceand be visitor encouraged will measuresand approaches to site, the security realm to public improvements including site, the to adjacent immediately and within spaces the to Enhancements realised. is site ofthe of OUV enhancement and communication conservation, to the projects ofsuch contribution positive the to organisations ensure potential forpartner with work We will ofWestminster. Palace the and Renewal Restoration the of in particular period, Plan the during Site Heritage World the affect will projects ofsignificant /Anumber 40.6 theplan. managementin identified OUV of the attributes key and significant site the makes ofwhat Value for asummary Universal should refer to Statement the of Outstanding CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY However, most listed buildings need to remain need buildings listed However, most significance. ofits part be often very will this and built, was it for which that be will building for alisted use best the 40.10 general, /In we require will stolen, reinstatement. their or are damaged features such If managed. be should consider how risk will this applicants undergoingvacant, work or on market the and are buildings when theft or ofdamage risk at be can fittings and fixtures Historic structures. and roof staircases chimney breasts, openings, of foundations), as well(including as patterns building the of structure the levels, floor historic ofrooms, hierarchy and location form, plan as may This internal include featuresinterest. such to special contribute which elements those protect and should identify toApplicants significance. contribute which ofwork phases later any and building original ofthe style and materials detail, and relatefabric to architectural the sensitively original or important to safeguard buildings listed to extensions and alterations /We40.9 expect development. city’s ofthe record provide anthese irreplaceable physical together furniture; ofstreet items to small landmarks from range well-known structures and buildings listed 11,000 /Our 40.8 Listed buildings managed. and are understood setting its of within development impacts cumulative the ensure and setting wider its and site the

enhance reveal significance. or better its to should building a take listed opportunities of setting the within development achieved, sustainably be can it where and setting upon have they impacts assessed demonstrate should Applicants setting. its harm may building listed a affect physically doesn’t which 40.12 /Even development at some distance (NPPF). Framework Policy Planning National the in out set as demonstrated, been have considered where exceptional circumstances be only will harm substantial in result will which demolition The total building. orthe substantial of conservation long-term the achieve to flexibly applied be may policies plan development other building, for alisted use viable optimum the finding In value. heritage their with consistent uses active into back buildings bring and works repair development enable which will necessary support Register, we will Risk at Heritage England’s Historic on those including threats, other or decay neglect, through risk are at buildings 40.11 listed /Where and access. servicing loadings, floor proofing, sound protection, fire as such to issues given consideration particular with or modifications, extensions harmful into new the use without converted ofbeing capable be possible, as of so should, building far use is the proposed, achange Where this. secure help can of use changes and sensitive and suitable long-term, the in conserved to be viable economically DESIGN 152

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 35: Archaeological Priority Areas and Scheduled Monuments in Westminster

153 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

Conservation areas 40.16 / Demolition or substantial demolition of the Jewel Tower; and a subterranean commercial unlisted buildings that make a positive contribution ice-well, Park Crescent West) will be afforded the 40.13 / Westminster’s exceptional range of to a conservation area will be resisted unless it can highest levels of protection. conservation areas are designated for their special be demonstrated that the public benefits of the historic or architectural interest. Many have a high proposals, including the quality of the replacement 40.20 / The Greater London Archaeological proportion of listed buildings and some contain building, outweigh the case for retention of the Advisory Service (GLAAS) identify Archaeological townscape of more than local significance. It is building. Any replacement buildings in a Priority Areas (APAs) based on evidence held in particularly important that development in conservation area must respect and seek to the Greater London Historic Environmental Record conservation areas is of the highest architectural enhance its character and appearance. In some (GLHER). Each APA is assigned to a tier reflecting quality and responds positively to their character circumstances, demolition behind retained facades their archaeological sensitivity and significance. and appearance. can provide a way to protect facades of townscape merit while allowing new accommodation to be 40.21 / Applications for development which 40.14 / We will not accept outline planning developed behind this and may be acceptable involves ground works in APAs in Tiers 1-3 must applications for development in, or affecting the where the overall integrity of unlisted buildings be accompanied by an archaeological desk-based setting of, conservation areas. Applicants should is maintained in street views. assessment and, where appropriate, field demonstrate a full understanding of the significance evaluations to demonstrate that potential impacts of the area, explaining how its key characteristics 40.17 / Conservation area audits provide additional of proposed development on archaeological have informed proposals and identifying those guidance for applicants and identify buildings and significance have been fully considered. All land elements which contribute positively to character features which contribute to or detract from outside APAs is treated as being in Tier 4 but major and appearance. These may include buildings, individual areas across Westminster. We will review developments in these areas sometimes require landmarks, views, trees, open spaces, historic plots and update these where necessary and keep the same archaeological evidence as higher tiers. widths, street layouts and land use patterns or other conservation area boundaries under review. features of architectural or historic interest which 40.22 / The design of development should make contribute to local distinctiveness. Archaeology provision for incorporation, safeguarding and preservation in situ of archaeological remains 40.15 / Opportunities should be taken to 40.18 / Westminster’s archaeology is an wherever possible and there will always be a enhance conservation areas wherever possible, irreplaceable and fragile asset. Investigation has presumption in favour of the retention of nationally- for example through the redevelopment or revealed evidence of prehistoric, Roman, Saxon important archaeology in situ. Where we agree that improvement of buildings or features which detract medieval and post medieval archaeology. conservation of archaeological remains in situ is from the area, reinstatement of original detail or impossible or deposits are of lesser significance, historic plot widths and original urban grain, 40.19 / Westminster’s three Scheduled investigation, recording and an appropriate level where appropriate. Monuments (the Chapter House and Pyx Chamber of publication and archiving will be required. next to the abbey cloisters, Westminster Abbey;

154 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Historic Parks and Gardens Non-designated heritage assets 40.23 / Westminster’s rich legacy of historic parks 40.27 / Although the highest level of protection 41. Townscape and architecture and gardens are a cherished part of Westminster’s will be afforded to designated heritage assets A. Development will be sensitively designed, heritage and an intrinsic part of the city’s character. and those considered to be most significant, having regard to the prevailing scale, These include garden squares, designed landscapes, non-designated heritage assets also contribute heights, character, building lines and public parks, churchyards and private gardens. positively to Westminster’s historic environment. plot widths, materials, architectural These may include local buildings of merit (inside quality and degree of uniformity in 40.24 / The Royal Parks and several other parks, or outside conservation areas), parks and the surrounding townscape. gardens and squares are included on Historic gardens, street furniture or archaeological England’s Register of Parks and Gardens of deposits. Unlisted buildings and other features B. Spaces and features that form an Special Historic Interest and as such are and spaces of merit may be identified by us and important element in Westminster’s recognised as designated heritage assets. local communities in conservation area audits, local townscapes or contribute to the Proposals that will have a harmful impact on their supplementary planning documents, specific significance of a heritage asset will be significance will be required to meet the relevant studies or in neighbourhood plans. In some conserved, enhanced and sensitively tests set out in the NPPF. circumstances, they may come to light as part of integrated within new development, the development management process. including important architectural details, 40.25 / Most London Squares in Westminster are boundary walls and railings, historic roof protected by the London Squares Preservation Act 40.28 / Some non-designated heritage assets are forms or structures, open lightwells, historic 1931 and many other gardens and open spaces, subject to other legislation and guidance, including or characteristic shopfronts and street although not designated heritage assets, are of London Squares and Archaeological Priority furniture, as well as squares, parks and local interest and contribute to the character and Areas, as set out above. We will work with local gardens. Where possible, lost or damaged setting of conservation areas and listed buildings. communities and other stakeholders to improve features will be reinstated or restored. understanding of local heritage of interest and 40.26 / Changes to the layout, design, character, develop criteria to ensure a consistent approach is EXTENSIVE DEVELOPMENTS use and function of historic parks and gardens taken to the future identification and conservation C. Extensive development will maximise should retain and enhance their significance. of our local heritage. opportunities to enhance the character, Features such as original planting layout, garden quality and functionality of the site and its buildings, statuary, railings, steps and fountains surroundings, including creating new should be identified and protected. Views from compositions and points of interest, and and towards historic open spaces can also be high-quality new streets and spaces, linked particularly significant and the impact of to the surrounding townscape to development on views and the setting of open maximise accessibility. spaces should be carefully managed to maintain the character and enjoyment of these spaces.

155 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

ALTERATIONS AND EXTENSIONS each property within the complete local views (including local views of terrace or group; or metropolitan importance) will contribute D. Alterations and extensions will respect the positively to their characteristics, character of the existing and adjoining 3. in other locations where the composition and significance and will buildings, avoid adverse visual and amenity proposed roof form is of appropriate remedy past damage to these views impacts and will not obscure important design, sympathetic to the architectural wherever possible. architectural features or disrupt any character of the building and does uniformity, patterns, rhythms or groupings not cause harm to amenity or of buildings that contribute positively to heritage assets. Westminster’s distinctive townscape. F. Within the Opportunity Areas, in the 41.1 / The densely developed townscape and E. In predominantly residential areas an International Centres of the West End and concentration of heritage assets in Westminster additional roof storey will be permitted Knightsbridge and the Major Centre, and in means that most development opportunities where this adds new residential floorspace other commercial locations on the Transport involve the infilling of small sites or extensions to an existing unit or creates a new self- for London and Strategic Road networks, to existing buildings within areas of established contained residential unit and fulfils one upwards extensions of one or more storeys townscape. We will seek to ensure the design of of the following criteria: which create additional commercial such development will respond positively to the floorspace will be permitted on unlisted 1. the application site forms part of a terrace character of Westminster’s diverse and distinctive buildings, provided they are of appropriate or group where a variety of roof additions neighbourhoods and celebrate and build upon and high quality design, do not impact or alterations create an established mixed the legacy of high-quality architecture in the city. adversely on heritage assets and pattern and further development of a incorporate set backs to minimise visibility similar form would not cause additional 41.2 / It is important that what makes different from street level, where appropriate. harm or would help to unify a group of parts of Westminster special and unique is not lost buildings and townscape; or as our city grows and develops. Our varied G. In all cases other than those listed in townscapes include highly uniform residential 2. in the case of a terrace or group of clauses E and F, proposals for upwards terraces, squares and crescents which form unlisted buildings which has an existing extensions will be assessed using the architectural set-pieces, relatively modest workers’ roof line unimpaired by extensions, the criteria in clause D of this policy. housing and mews and in contrast, areas of varied development would take a coordinated townscape characterised by architecture from a approach, adding roof extensions of WESTMINSTER VIEWS wide variety of eras and in a variety of styles. consistent and appropriate design to H. New development affecting strategic and

156 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

41.3 / We recognise that there will be greater in Westminster and most are likely to be covered 41.8 / Roof extensions can be a practical way potential for modern intervention, regeneration by site briefs or design guides providing further to create additional floorspace but can also and change in certain areas of Westminster, where guidance. Where they do exist or become have a significant impact on the character and the quality of the existing built environment may available, their potential to improve the quality and appearance of buildings and the wider townscape, be lower or character more varied. In other areas, functionality of the area must be fully realised. A and a sensitive approach and highest standards the quality and / or uniformity of existing comprehensive and integrated approach to urban of design will be required. townscape demands a different architectural design will be required, including consideration of response and a greater degree of integration with building layouts, creation of new public realm, 41.9 / National and draft London Plan policy identifies the existing context. In general, the more uniform streets and spaces, incorporation of landscaping the potential for building upwards to increase the townscape, the greater the degree of and infrastructure to maximise the opportunities housing supply. Where upwards extensions will allow coherence with the original scale, form and for positive change. Designs will build in capacity the creation of additional residential floorspace to materials of the existing townscape that should for future needs, promoting legibility and ensuring provide family housing or new self-contained be shown by new development. good connections, while also taking into account residential units and they are sympathetic to the the wider setting. townscape context, they will be supported. 41.4 / A variety of distinctive spaces and features contribute to the character and appearance of Alterations and extensions 41.10 / Many of Westminster’s residential areas are townscapes across the city. The layout and pattern characterised by terraced housing of consistent 41.6 / Given the densely developed character of of development in Westminster, much of which was design. On terraced houses of the Georgian and the city, extensions to existing buildings (both developed in the Georgian and Victorian eras, gives Victorian eras, mansards will very often be the most upwards and outwards) have an important role to rise to certain locally distinctive building forms, appropriate form of roof extension. However, this play in meeting the growth ambitions of this plan. rhythms and patterns of architectural detail within the will depend on the age and style of the building. They can provide room for expanding families, townscape. Where such characteristic architectural Where mansards or other roofs are an established may provide additional housing units, and can detailing, features and spaces contribute to the feature within a group of buildings, roof extensions allow businesses to grow, as part of single or townscape, these should be retained, enhanced and which follow the established pattern will usually be mixed-use development. integrated within new designs, where appropriate. considered acceptable, but they should respect The protection and /or restoration of such features existing architectural features such as chimneys, 41.7 / Works to alter and extend existing buildings and spaces is particularly important when heritage party wall upstands, parapets and cornices. will be supported where they are successfully assets are affected. integrated with their surroundings. To achieve this, 41.11 / If properties affected form part of a group extensions should be subordinate to the host Extensive developments or terrace that remain largely unaltered or have building, respecting the scale, detailing and a historic or distinctive roofscape integral to the 41.5 / Extensive development covers a large site materials of both existing buildings and adjoining architectural character of that building, further area and has some independence of character townscape. Care should always be taken not to upward extension may be unacceptable, and the which differentiates it from the surrounding disfigure buildings or upset their proportions. design of development proposals will need to be townscape. Such sites are relatively uncommon

157 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

especially carefully considered. Where a terrace criteria in clause F and will be sympathetic to age 41.16 / There is a hierarchy of protected views in retains a uniform roofline with no roof extensions, and character of the building and townscape. terms of their significance, sensitivity and status in the addition of one roof extension or multiple roof the planning system. Strategic views are those extensions of different designs can cause harm 41.13 / The creation of larger extensions to existing which are considered to help define the character to the appearance of the roofscape. However, we buildings may also lead to additional challenges of London and are identified in the London Plan will consider applications which would take a and the capacity to support additional loading will - eighteen of these affect Westminster. Several of coordinated approach, adding roof extensions of be an important factor in determining the feasibility these are protected vistas and have geometrically consistent design to a complete terrace or group of of delivering such rooftop development. Where defined viewing corridors, subject to specific unlisted buildings with a uniform roofline. Upwards substantial demolition of existing buildings will be protection and height limits. Several designated extension will usually be inappropriate where a required to allow for additional height this will be townscape views and river prospect views are mansard or other later roof extension already exists. considered having regard to the criteria set out in focused on the Palace of Westminster and protect heritage policy. its silhouette. Guidance on these views is set out 41.12 / While one additional storey will usually be in the London View Management Framework. most appropriate, larger extensions of more than 41.14 / Even small-scale alterations and additions one storey may be appropriate in certain locations. can have a cumulative impact on townscape 41.17 / Local views are valued for their contribution Extensions which will deliver commercial floorspace character. The design of new doors, windows or to Westminster’s distinctive character areas. These that helps meet growth targets are most likely to be shopfonts should be carefully considered to relate may contribute to the appreciation of important appropriate within the identified growth areas of the sensitively to the existing building and adjoining listed and other landmark buildings or distinctive Opportunity Areas, in designated town centres or townscape. Additions such as plant, balustrades, skylines or groupings of buildings, historic parks on major routes which are characterised by a larger fire escapes routes, telecommunications and gardens, and views along or across the River scale of townscape. In these locations more than equipment, cameras and alarms, micro-generation Thames and Westminster’s canals. Recognising the one storey will be supported where it is equipment, any associated cables and fixings, as national importance of Westminster’s heritage and demonstrated it can be designed to minimise harm well as air conditioning units, flues and water tanks townscape, we have also identified certain to townscape, amenity and heritage assets and will should always be carefully designed, sited and ‘metropolitan views’ of major landmarks and the help fulfil growth targets. This will depend on detailed or screened where appropriate. most significant river views and areas of townscape townscape context. Not all of the buildings within in the city. The council will publish a list of views of areas identified will be suitable for roof extensions Westminster Views metropolitan importance and prepare guidance on and there may be other commercial locations their management. Other views are important at a 41.15 / Westminster’s unique townscape gives rise across the city where larger roof extensions can local level and may be identified by us or local to some of the most familiar and cherished views be accommodated. More than one storey of communities in conservation area audits, of London. These include views of the River commercial floor space may also be permitted in neighbourhood plans or other area-based studies. Thames and its frontages, the Royal Parks, as well smaller retail centres including district centres and as many other ‘picture postcard’ views of famous CAZ town clusters or other commercial locations London landmarks. where it can be demonstrated that they meet the

158 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 36: Protected Vistas and Other Strategic Views

159 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

41.18 / New development should make a positive contribution to the characteristics and composition 42. Building height and importance of the location in terms of significant views, both strategic and local, of height, scale, massing and form; and A. Westminster is not generally suitable for and improvement to significant views will be tall buildings. Developments significantly 2. achieve exceptional architectural quality encouraged. This may include a proactive higher than their surroundings will need and innovative and sustainable building approach to view enhancement by repairing to demonstrate that building higher is the design from all viewpoints and past damaging development. For example, only way to make the most efficient use directions; and opportunities should be taken to reduce the scale of the site. and impact of existing harmful buildings in the 3. create an attractive and legible foreground or middle ground of protected vistas. streetscape that takes account of the B. Buildings of more than 30 metres, or those Careful consideration of building materials and use of the public realm for a variety of that are more than twice the prevailing finishes can make proposals more sympathetic uses and includes active uses at ground context height (whichever is lower) will in long distance views. A proportionate approach floor level; and be considered to be tall buildings, and will to view protection will be taken, taking into therefore need to satisfy both the general 4. enhance the character and account the significance of the view and principles in clause D and relevant distinctiveness of an area without magnitude of impact of proposals. locational principles in clauses E and F (and negatively affecting valued townscapes for Housing Renewal Areas, Policy 43). and landscapes, or detracting from 41.19 / We will work with adjoining boroughs to important landmarks, heritage assets, ensure the impact of development in Westminster C. Buildings that do not meet the definition key views and other historic skylines on protected views in other boroughs (and vice- of a tall building but are higher than their and their settings; and versa) is understood and managed carefully and surroundings should positively respond sensitively. Potential impacts on views should be 5. mitigate negative impacts on the to prevailing context heights and local identified through visibility analysis, supported microclimate and amenity of the site character and may be subject to clauses wherever possible by the use of accurate 3D and surrounding area; and D, E and F of this policy (and for Housing digital modelling. Renewal Areas, Policy 43). 6. avoid unacceptable impacts on aviation and telecommunications; and GENERAL PRINCIPLES 7. provide publicly accessible viewing D. Proposals for tall buildings will be platforms at the roof of the building required to: (for any exceptionally tall buildings). 1. be proportionate to the role, function

160 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

LOCATIONAL PRINCIPLES MARYLEBONE FLYOVER / cause harm to the Outstanding Universal EDGWARE ROAD JUNCTION Value of the World Heritage Site and its E. Development of tall buildings may be setting or breach its protected silhouette acceptable within the Paddington Tall buildings may be appropriate to mark and must be sensitive to the other listed Opportunity Areas, Victoria Opportunity the junction of the flyover and Edgware buildings, conservation areas, registered Areas, Marylebone flyover / Edgware Road Road but must be designed to relate to and parks and gardens. junction and the Housing Renewal Areas. complement each other and help to frame Provided in the first instance they comply with this area as a gateway junction. The prevailing context height in Victoria the general principles under clause D. These is 6 residential storeys (20m) with a The height of any tall building in this principles need to be cross-referenced varied context. Tall buildings in this area location must step down significantly from, against the area specific design principles set of 2 to 3 times the context height may and be subordinate to, those in the out below, and for the Housing Renewal be appropriate. Paddington Basin cluster. They must also Areas, policy 43 and with site-specific be slender and elegant in their form. The guidance set out in the forthcoming Site F. Proposals for tall buildings outside of the acceptability of a tall building proposed in Allocations Development Plan Document: areas identified in clause E will not this area depends on the quality of its generally be acceptable, and will need to design, reflecting its role as a local PADDINGTON OPPORTUNITY AREA demonstrate how they (in addition to the landmark. general principles under clause D): There may be potential for further tall The prevailing context height in this area is buildings in this area that complement and 1. significantly strengthen the legibility of 6 residential storeys but as it sits within a help to frame the setting of Paddington a town centre or mark the location of a varied context. Tall buildings of 2 to 3 times Basin and contribute to the quality and transport interchange or other location the context height may be appropriate. character of the existing cluster. of civic or visual significance within the area; and Building heights in Paddington should step VICTORIA OPPORTUNITY AREA down from the central location/high point at 2. will not undermine the prominence There may be potential for further tall One Merchant Square. and / or integrity of existing landmark buildings in this area that complement and buildings and tall building clusters. The prevailing context height for the wider help to frame the setting of Victoria Station Paddington area is identified as 6 residential and Victoria Street and contribute to the storeys (20m) with a varied context. Tall quality and character of the existing cluster. buildings within this area of 2 to 3 times this Any tall buildings in this area must not context height may be appropriate.

161 CONTENTS approach, which considers the principal height principal approach, the whichconsiders another. We therefore follow a context-based in not but area, one in tall as perceived be may eight-storey An context. dependent building on its is height ofabuilding’s impact /The 42.3 adding additional height. without site the use of to make efficient explored been have options other that evidence provide surroundingshigher their should than therefore Proposals incorporating buildings significantly height. adding without developments high density to deliver ways are many There high. building mean not does always densely /Building 42.2 city. the in height building for strategy We apositive set therefore plan. ofthis objectives regeneration and growth the deliver help can and townscape to our contribution make can – buildings tall a positive well-designed when –and locations some in that recognise also for However, suitable buildings. tall generally we not is Westminster that remains, and was, position The in boroughs. historic buildings neighbouring tall ofthe ofsome height to the close come not does this but Areas, Opportunity Paddington and Victoria the in concentrated mainly is Height developed. densely already is that townscape 42.1 and hashistoric a diverse /Westminster buildings will be considered. will buildings for any proposals which higher a against baseline development. The prevailing context height sets bythe impacted area surrounding of the CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

need to mitigate their potential adverse impacts. toneed potential their adverse mitigate the with balanced be will buildings tall of benefits potential The townscape. the in out standing tall, are exceptionally that buildings for any require we which platforms accessible viewing publicly suchas also can provide publicbuildings benefits, of and enhance an character area. the Talllegibility improve location, important an mark can They /Tall42.6 function. a clear should fulfil buildings height. of appropriate bybeing including townscape, to our contribution exceptional design and make a positive are of make sure they with to comply need will all that applications building tall principles general The building. ofatall suitability or impact the determines that aspect only the not is of abuilding height the addition, In factors. many by influenced is ofabuilding height appropriate /The 42.5 principles General policy. this in buildings for tall criteria design the with to comply context or design due their to height, impact significant havea still but policy the in building of atall definition the meet not do that proposals require We may upwards. building existing an extending or building anew byconstructing created be can building tall A approach. policy specific andlarge therefore they buildings, require a or ofhigh that than greater is impact their as is building tall a what to define necessary is /It 42.4

outside of the areas identified in the policy. the in identified areas ofthe outside buildings for tall proposals any to asses criteria We additional set therefore clusters. building tall or buildings tall other of function the affect not does and townscape the in place ofthe role the strengthens it as appropriate be may city the in elsewhere scale ofalocal building atall where areas.these However, there may be instances therefore of acceptable not outside generally areas five the tall are andbuildings outside for buildings tall opportunities further not identify did Study Height Building /The Westminster 42.9 full. in met havebeen policy this in principles general the demonstrating by justified robustly be ranges height must identified from the deviation Any impacts. to scheme its is subject individual ofeach height appropriate The (2019). Study Height Building Westminster ofthe part as tested havebeen ranges height The height. were ofuniform greater scope for increased areas the if height than is there areas, these in height in ofvariation alot is relevant proposals in building tall the there areas. As ofany consideration for the abaseline set policy the /The prevailing42.8 in context identified heights locations. in those for buildings tall principles also informed design the The study well connected. are and regeneration and to growth a contribution make could city, ofthe parts other than constraints fewer have they as buildings tall additional for capacity have may that five areas identifies (2019) Study Height 42.7 Building /The Westminster Locational principles DESIGN

162

CONTENTS CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 37: Victoria Opportunity Area, Ebury Bridge Figure 38: Paddington Opportunity Area, Marylebone flyover / Estate Housing Renewal Area Edgware Road junction, Church Street Housing Renewal Area

163 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

comprehensive public benefits that large estate- 43. Building height in the have the tallest element towards the wide development can deliver, including the northern end of the area marking Ebury significant contribution to the strategic priority for housing renewal areas Bridge and the crossing of the railway more affordable housing in Westminster. This does A. Delivering large scale public estate line, with building heights stepping not, however, mean that the heights for housing regeneration comes with viability down from this location. renewal areas are limitless – we will expect new challenges that are different to private buildings to be of an appropriate scale for their local 2. On Church Street Estate developments, such as decanting of context and applicants will demonstrate how the are at the main east-west route and existing residents and a higher affordable proposal adheres to clauses A – D of Policy 42. the commercial focus for the area; and housing requirement. While the design are delivered in the heart of the principles for these estates remains 43.2 / At present only Church Street/Edgware regeneration scheme as part of a paramount and any scheme must adhere Road and Ebury Bridge estates have been comprehensive approach. to the general building height principles identified for housing renewal, however, other in Policy 42 D, what is considered an housing estates may be identified as suitable appropriate height must be balanced for renewal in future. against the wider public benefits the scheme is able to viably deliver. 43.1 / We are ambitious in our plans to deliver more affordable housing in Westminster; a significant B. At the time of writing the plan, the opportunity to contribute to this delivery is on 44. Public realm Church Street / Edgware Road and existing estates designated for renewal. The housing A. Development will contribute to a well- Ebury Bridge housing estates have renewal programme offers opportunities to deliver designed public realm with use of high been identified for renewal and there new high quality homes for our residents, with new quality and durable materials capable of are opportunities for taller buildings green open space and community facilities. Housing easy maintenance and cleaning, and the here where they contribute to the estate renewal is inherently complicated, particularly integration of high-quality soft landscaping creation of a place with a strong and in terms of viability because of the responsibilities to as part of the streetscape design. enhanced character and: decant and return existing residents and the 50% affordable housing targets on public land set by the AN INCLUSIVE AND 1. On Ebury Bridge Estate London Plan. The Westminster Building Height Study ACCESSIBLE PUBLIC REALM respect the setting and views from (2019) identified scope for taller buildings on the the surrounding Georgian and B. The public realm will be safe, attractive and Church Street / Edgware Road and Ebury Bridge Victorian terraces within the accessible to all. Development should estates, however this policy does not direct adjacent conservation areas; contribute to improving connectivity, legibility appropriate heights for the estates. Prescriptively and permeability of the public realm and the indicating appropriate heights here may preclude the design solutions necessary to facilitate the

164 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

network of public spaces in the city through: COMMERCE IN THE PUBLIC REALM high quality public art as an integral part of the design of new major developments, 1. helping to provide a network of C. Additional kiosks or other structures for particularly around gateway locations and connected and defined frontages the display and sale of goods outside of where they benefit legibility. and spaces such as pocket parks; a market will be resisted. The replacement and relocation of existing structures will 2. optimising active frontages towards F. New statues, monuments or memorials be designed and sited to: public streets and spaces particularly in the public realm will be directed outside in areas identified as appropriate for 1. respect local context and not detract of the Monument Saturation Zone. tall buildings; from any heritage asset; SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS 3. ensuring that soft landscaping is 2. minimise obstruction to pedestrian maximised to soften the streetscape movement and street cleansing G. Signs and advertisements will make a and provide visual and environmental arrangements; positive contribution to amenity or public relief from hard landscaping, safety by being sensitively designed in 3. minimise energy consumption buildings and traffic; terms of their size, location and degree 4. for heating and lighting; ensure they of illumination, their impact on the building 4. using high quality new, or reinstated are capable of quick removal on which they are displayed, local context, paving materials whose colour and street-scene and wider townscape. texture underline a sense of place and D. Proposals for trading from premises consistency of materials and is an extending into the street (including H. Pedestrian signage will be consistent with appropriately engineered surface that provision of tables and chairs on the Legible London or any subsequent is fit for purpose; highway) will be supported where they successor standards. would not: 5. creating clear sight lines, improve lighting and following the principles 1. harm local amenity; of designing out crime; 2. compromise pedestrian movement 6. creating new quiet routes; or traffic conditions; 44.1 / The public realm refers to all the physically 7. resisting the creation of gated and visually public, accessible space which form 3. impede refuse storage and street communities which do not promote the setting for human interaction, such as streets, cleansing arrangements. socially inclusive and cohesive pavements, forecourts, squares, parks, open neighbourhoods or connectivity PUBLIC ART, STATUES AND MONUMENTS spaces and building facades. The cross-cutting between places. impacts of public realm on strategic permeability, E. Applicants will be encouraged to provide legibility and connectivity of the city’s public realm means that it is intrinsically linked to the City Plan’s

165 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

10 objectives and contributes to the delivery of An inclusive and accessible public realm economic development. However, it can also other core City Plan policy strands such as hinder pedestrian movement, cause traffic 44.4 / Given the pressures on space in sustainable travel, design, green infrastructure and congestion, undermine the character of historic Westminster, in order to ensure an inclusive public town centres. Addressing improvements to the areas, result in adverse impacts on nearby realm a particular priority must be given to the public realm from a strategic viewpoint is essential residential amenity, and compromise city needs of pedestrians, with a special focus on - while placing public realm considerations at the management functions such as street cleansing disabled people, those with dementia, children heart of individual development schemes and and refuse collection. and others with particular mobility requirements. establishing the critical measures an applicant needs to consider when going through the 44.9 / Given the intense pressures on much of the 44.5 / To facilitate this objective whilst recognising planning process. city’s kerb space, and the need to prioritise safe that pedestrian movement will increase through pedestrian movement, commercial activity of this new infrastructure projects, such as Crossrail, 44.2 / All such spaces must be carefully designed, nature must be carefully managed to balance its pavement widening will be promoted. This using high quality materials and detailing which benefits and adverse impacts. approach and the need to connect with planned respect and enhance the existing character of public realm and transport enhancement projects areas within the city. The public realm will be 44.10 / Therefore, a net growth in semi-permanent may require the loss of some ground floor space carefully managed and maintained, with the kiosks (i.e. those that can be removed without the within a development site’s red line boundary in principle of decluttering advocated whilst need for dismantling) will be avoided. Where order to make a scheme acceptable. discouraging graffiti and deterring anti-social replacement facilities are proposed (including behaviour and crime to ensure the amenity, those in alternative locations to the existing), they 44.6 / The installation of seating will be well-being and health of residents and visitors. should deliver net benefits by being designed and encouraged where appropriate and where it adds constructed in a manner that makes a positive to the peaceful enjoyment of the public realm. 44.3 / The public realm should be distinctive and contribution to their proposed setting and wider attractive and positively contribute to the City Plan energy efficiency goals. Their location should not 44.7 / It is important to distinguish between private objective of creating and enhancing successful impede pedestrian movement through an area and public space in order to create a more cohesive places. It should offer opportunities to meet, and between buildings, and any arrangements for and defined street scene whilst aiding delineation congregate and socialise, as well as provide street cleaning. This includes being designed to of ownership. Boundary treatments which help to opportunity for quiet enjoyment. Wherever avoid stock spreading onto the pavement. green parts of Westminster are promoted in an possible, development should make the most of attempt to soften the built environment particularly opportunities to green the urban realm through 44.11 / It is considered, that a single, well designed in public spaces where people gather. new planting and vegetation in order to soften the and located structure could have less negative townscape. Ongoing maintenance of the public impacts than clusters of smaller stalls, and as such Commerce in the public realm realm is a key consideration and will be secured may be preferable where it can be used to house through planning conditions and/or legal 44.8 / Commerce in the public realm can add to several separate functions. Quick removal of agreements where appropriate. the diversity and vibrancy of city life and support structures may be necessary to facilitate highways

166 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

Figure 39: Monument saturation zones

167 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

works, street cleansing, or other works for special quality public places and a public affirmation of planned, executed and managed, advertising can events in the public realm. pride in new development projects. It contributes enhance peoples’ experience of the public realm. to creating a sense of place and a visually We will work with the industry to find ways of 44.12 / Extending trading onto the street, stimulating environment, which adds to public ensuring the most is made of the positive aspects. including through outdoor seating, can help enjoyment of the public realm. Careful consideration will be given to the size, sustain businesses such as cafés and restaurants location, materials, details, and method of by adding to their offer. Where well-managed, 44.15 / Westminster has an outstanding heritage illumination of proposed signs and advertisements such use of outdoor space can also enhance the of more than 300 statues and memorials. Many of together with the impact they will have on the utilisation of the public realm as a space for social these were by the leading artists of their day and architectural features of the building upon which interaction. However, this needs to be carefully are major works of art in their own right. Almost they are fixed. It is recognised that commercial balanced against the need to facilitate movement half of all memorials, 47%, are situated in the royal advertising on shrouds and hoardings along with of pedestrians and other highways users. and governmental heart of Westminster – a the high level and temporary advertisements may relatively small area centred on Whitehall and cause substantial injury to visual amenity and can 44.13 / The noise associated with such in the Royal Parks. It is not possible to continue have a particularly detrimental effect on development can also cause disturbance to to accommodate new statues and monuments surrounding townscape. residential occupiers of upper floors. Where in Westminster on the same scale as in the past, schemes are supported, they will be required to and the most central areas are already saturated. 44.17 / Legible London provides a pedestrian store temporary street furniture off-street outside However, new statues and monuments are strongly signage system that has been installed at more of trading hours, so as not impede refuse storage encouraged in other areas of Westminster, where than 1,700 locations across the capital (450 and street cleaning. City management powers will public art is under-represented. within Westminster) to aid effective wayfinding. also be used alongside planning powers to limit The uniform nature of these signs is critical to the number of tables and chairs, hours of use, Signs and advertisements their successful interpretation (particularly and secure suitable management arrangements. across borough boundaries), and as such all 44.16 / Signs and advertisements are common Permission will generally be granted only for a future pedestrian signs should be consistent features in many parts of Westminster, in particular temporary period in order to allow the impact of in design and quality. in the more commercial areas of the West End. the tables and chairs to be monitored and Although they play a role in providing information, re-assessed. Further guidance on the effective control of signs and advertisements is important management of these issues will be forthcoming as they can have significant impacts on the quality in the form of an a Supplementary Planning and appearance of the street scene and upon the Document. building on which they are displayed. They may also affect amenity and public safety, including Public art, statues and monuments highway safety, and can damage the appearance 44.14 / Public art demonstrates a shared of the streetscape and the architectural integrity of commitment by us and applicants to high our built environment. On the other hand, properly

168 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

and maintain a safe and secure environment for 45.3 / Developments that achieve Secured by 45. Security measures people visiting, residing and working in Design accreditation will help to make Westminster Westminster. safe and sustainable, a place where people want in the public realm to visit and stay. Therefore, as a minimum the basic A. Development will provide an integrated 45.2 / Building and public realm schemes will be principles of Secured By Design, including approach to the security of the site assessed as part of the planning application counter-terrorism, should be incorporated into new including buildings and any associated process to ensure their resilience against developments to minimise potential physical risks, public or private spaces. emergencies including terrorism and related deter terrorism, detect terrorist activity and help hazards. This assessment will be based on advice mitigate its effects. Incorporating security features B. Development and or public realm from the relevant authorities, in particular the can be costly if it is thought about too late and improvement proposals will be required to Metropolitan Police. To ensure that potential have to be retrofitted into schemes. They should incorporate appropriate counter terrorism security-related vulnerabilities have been therefore be considered at the outset of the measures advised by the Metropolitan identified, assessed and, where necessary, design process. Police and / or the council. Where addressed in a manner that is appropriate and appropriate, the retrofitting of existing proportionate, applicants for major development 45.4 / Security measures and surveillance buildings and spaces may be required. should undertake a Security Considerations equipment must, wherever possible, be sensitively Assessment process. This will to ensure that designed and positioned to avoid detrimental C. All security measures will be designed potential security-related vulnerabilities have been visual effects, as Westminster’s historic and implemented to take account of the identified, assessed and, where necessary, townscapes are sensitive to visual intrusion. functionality of the area and the needs of addressed in a manner that is appropriate and Measures should provide effective protection and its users, and will be sensitively designed proportionate. Where there is a clear threat from embrace good design. to respect the surrounding context and terrorism and to ensure security and counter- public realm. terrorism measures can be incorporated into 45.5 / In light of a significant vulnerability to higher risk developments and public spaces, terrorism, we will use planning conditions where applicants are encouraged to contact the appropriate and request legal agreements to Metropolitan Police’s Designing Out Crime Officers ensure design and other measures required under who will make contact with Counter Terrorism this policy are incorporated and maintained, 45.1 / Westminster attracts millions of visitors as an Security Advisors for further advice. Architects and including effective management of access to both international tourist destination, the centre for the engineers are also encouraged to seek advice private space and spaces that are accessible to UK government and the location for many other from the Metropolitan Police’s Counter Terrorism the public. Legal agreements may make provision institutions, businesses as well as educational, Security Advisors on appropriate counter-terrorism for long-term management and maintenance of medical and cultural venues. For these reasons it measures that can be incorporated in high risk security measures at the expense of the applicant. has places and uses that are terrorist targets – as developments and public spaces. shown by recent attacks. It is a priority to ensure

169 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS CONTENTS

46.1 / Basement extensions have become 46. Basement developments 1. do not extend beneath more than 50% an increasingly common form of development of the garden land – on small sites in Westminster in recent years. Although often A. Basement developments should: where the garden is 8m or less at its hidden from public view, such basement longest point, basements may extend excavation can have significant impacts on 1. incorporate measures recommended up to 4m from the original building in the amenity of neighbouring occupiers and in the structural statement or flood risk that direction; may affect ground conditions, biodiversity, assessment to safeguard structural heritage assets, local character and garden stability, and address surface water 2. leave a margin of undeveloped garden settings. This policy seeks to make sure that and sewerage flooding; land proportionate to the scale of the basement developments are appropriately development and the size of the garden 2. be designed and constructed to designed and applies to new basements as around the entire site boundary; minimise the impact at construction well as extensions to existing basements. and occupation stages on the 3. not comprise more than one storey surrounding area; beneath the lowest original floor level Basement development principles – exceptions may be made on large 3. protect heritage assets, and in the 46.2 / Excavation in a dense urban environment sites with high levels of accessibility case of listed buildings, not unbalance is more complex than many standard residential for construction; the building’s original hierarchy of extensions and has the potential to damage spaces where this contributes to its 4. provide a minimum of one metre existing and neighbouring structures and significance; and of soil depth (plus minimum 200mm infrastructure, and irreversibly alter ground drainage layer) and adequate overall conditions. Basement developments should 4. conserve the character and appearance soil volume above the top cover of therefore safeguard the structural stability of the of the existing building, garden setting the basement; and existing building, nearby buildings and other and the surrounding area, ensuring infrastructure including highway and railway lines/ lightwells, plant, vents, skylights and 5. not encroach more than 1.8m under any tunnels. Applications for basement development means of escape are sensitively part of the adjacent highway and retain should be accompanied by a structural designed and discreetly located. a minimum vertical depth below the methodology statement and appropriate self- footway or carriageway of 900mm certification from a suitably qualified engineer EXTENT AND DEPTH OF BASEMENTS between the highway surface and to demonstrate the impacts of the proposed vault structure. B. Basement developments will be supported development have been understood. where they:

170 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 DESIGN CONTENTS

46.3 / Given their nature, basements can be 46.5 / Westminster’s heritage may be sensitive 46.9 / The most appropriate form of basement vulnerable to flooding from a number of sources to the impact of basement development. Listed development will be no more than one storey including the overflowing of drains and nearby buildings and archaeology can be especially (approximately 2.7m floor to ceiling height) below watercourses, groundwater flooding and surface vulnerable to damage when excavation takes place. the lowest part of the original floor level. In some water flooding. A site-specific Flood Risk The internal hierarchy of buildings could also be cases, an exception could be made for large sites Assessment (FRA) will be required for basement unbalanced by basement developments, negatively when they are able to accommodate plant and developments. Measures to be incorporated may impacting on the architectural and historic interest machinery and include appropriate access include Sustainable Drainage Systems (SuDS) and and significance of historic buildings. (e.g. rear or side access) to enable construction positive pumped devices or equivalent to address without an adverse impact on neighbouring uses sewerage flooding, or other measures 46.6 / When poorly designed, basements can or occupiers. The definition of large sites will recommended in the FRA. negatively affect the character and appearance depend on individual circumstances. of buildings and the wider townscape. Private 46.4 / The construction works associated gardens also make a significant contribution to 46.10 / Sufficient soil depth will be required with basement excavation can often have a Westminster’s character as an important part of to support sustainable planting. In some serious impact on the quality of life of neighbours our green infrastructure network. A satisfactory circumstances a soil depth of up to 1.5m (plus and cause disruption. Applicants for basement landscaping scheme should be provided that drainage layer) may be required to support tree development must therefore demonstrate that incorporates soft landscaping, planting and growth. Applicants should provide detail of soil reasonable consideration has been given to permeable surfacing as appropriate. profile and composition. potential impacts of construction in line with our adopted Code of Construction Practice. Extent and depth of basements 46.11 / Work to basement vaults can restrict the A signed pro forma Appendix A of the Code of space available for services in the highway and 46.7 / Limiting the extent and depth of Construction Practice should be submitted as may make it difficult to access cables, pipes, basement development can help reduce both part of basement development applications. sewers, etc. for maintenance and to provide the risks associated with basement development Applicants for basement excavation works are essential items of street furniture. In order to and mitigate negative environmental and strongly encouraged to consult with neighbouring ensure that services and essential street amenity impacts. occupiers prior to submitting an application. furniture can be provided, adequate space Evidence of engagement with neighbouring must be available between the highway and 46.8 / Standards for extent of the garden (site area occupiers, including a schedule and timetable any excavation proposed under the highway. excluding the footprint of the original building) are of works may be requested as supporting Applications adjacent to or affecting the intended to strike a balance between allowing information with planning applications. Transport for London Road Network (TLRN) or development, while ensuring a substantial area public transport infrastructure should seek remains undeveloped (without any impermeable advice from Transport for London. surfacing installed) to ensure adequate drainage and preserve the garden setting.

171 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS CONTENTS

IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING

The City Plan, the London Plan and any made neighbourhood plans make up Westminster’s Development Plan. It is also supported by a suite of national planning policies and other local planning documents – illustrated by this diagram.

NPPF and National Statement of Community Authority Guidance Involvement Monitoring Report

City Plan 2019-2040 Policies Map

CIL Charging Schedule Westminster’s Development Plan Other council strategies

Forthcoming Site Allocations Development Plan Document

London Plan Neighbourhood Plans

Infrastructure Supplementary Delivery Plan Planning Documents

Figure 40: Westminster’s Development Plan

172 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS

Supplementary Planning Documents Neighbourhood Planning Implementation We will prepare additional information including Neighbourhood plans are written by the local Westminster’s Development Plan policies and technical notes and Supplementary Planning community - they are an important tool that gives national planning policies will be implemented Documents (SPDs) to explain more detail on how Westminster’s communities statutory powers to through Westminster’s Development Management to implement the City Plan policies effectively, shape how their local area develops. process. Legal agreements including Section 106, support the efficient use of land and the delivery Community Infrastructure Levy (CIL), Carbon and of the right kind of growth in the city. These will Neighbourhood plans must have regard to Air Quality Offset funds will also be used to help be published on our website and provide more national policies and guidance and be in general deliver the City Plan. We will allocate council detailed guidance that should be taken into conformity with the strategic policies in this resources (including capital funding) and use funding account when designing developments and City Plan to ensure they directly contribute to from other sources e.g. Greater London Authority, determining planning applications. the delivery of the City Plan objectives. Appendix Department for Environment Food and Rural Affairs 3 sets out a schedule of which policies in this plan and lottery grants to implement the City Plan. We will The SPDs will cover the follow topic areas, are strategic to help guide neighbourhood forums only use compulsory purchase powers where it is among others: in developing their plans. Neighbourhood plan demonstrated that there is a compelling case that it policies and spatial designations can differ from will enable the acquisition of land to help deliver our –– Planning Obligations and Affordable Housing the non-strategic policies. But they need to be in planning and regeneration objectives. –– Heritage general conformity with strategic City Plan policies. General conformity is judged on the Viability –– Design and Public Realm neighbourhood plan as a whole, so absolute Applicants should factor in the costs of delivering the –– North Bank conformity on every detail of strategic policy City Plan objectives when considering potential is not required. –– Environment development proposals or site purchases. Where proposals meet the policies in this plan, it will be –– Local Enforcement Westminster City Council offers bespoke assumed that they are viable.2 It is up to the applicant guidance and support for the delivery of –– West End. to demonstrate whether particular circumstances neighbourhood plans across the city - our justify the need for a viability assessment at website includes helpful guidance, information application stage. Such circumstances could include: on data sources and contact details.1

1 www.westminster.gov.uk/neighbourhood-planning 2 The policies in this plan have been independently viability tested

173 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

–– where development is proposed on an achieving compliance with the development which Working with partners and stakeholders unallocated site of a different type to those our policies seek to achieve. The council will We will work with neighbouring authorities, agencies used in the viability assessment that investigate all reported breaches of planning and partner organisations including the GLA and informed this plan; control in a transparent and proportionate manner community groups to deliver a range of services and and will pursue enforcement action where it is –– where further information on infrastructure realise the benefits of an integrated approach to considered expedient to do so. In determining or site costs is required; development and to ensure the realisation of shared whether it is relevant to pursue enforcement action objectives. We will continue to utilise our Open –– where the type of development proposed is regard will be given to national, regional and local Forum network to liaise with resident groups and the significantly different from standard models policy and to any other material considerations. designated neighbourhood forums on planning of development e.g. build to rent; and When pursuing enforcement action the council issues, where appropriate. gives priority to prevention and harm to residential –– where economic circumstances have significantly amenity; the effective functioning of lawful changed since the Plan was adopted. Monitoring business premises; preventing the loss of permanent residential accommodation and The council will monitor the implementation of Land use swaps other priority uses; and the preservation or City Plan policies to ensure that the objectives and The City Plan protects almost every land use in enhancement of our heritage assets and any harm targets within the Plan (as well as the programme one way or another throughout the city. Floorspace to visual amenity. All breaches of planning control for infrastructure set out in the IDP) are met. can be better protected when it can be transferred will be considered on their individual merits. The Through the Integrated Impact Assessment (IIA), to another site as part of estate management or council will prosecute offenders under the relevant the annual Authority Monitoring Report (AMR) and dual site developments. Therefore, a system of legislation where it is considered expedient and in Westminster’s Monitoring Framework we will keep land use swaps may be appropriate in some the public interest to do so. economic, social and environmental trends and circumstances to enable better development risks under review. outcomes. Within the Savile Row Special Policy Infrastructure delivery Area land use swaps will be considered where it The table opposite sets out Westminster’s key The Infrastructure Delivery Plan (IDP) will set out can be demonstrated that the proposal will result in monitoring indicators which will be used to monitor the key locations, sites and infrastructure, which at least equal quantity and greater quality provision success towards meeting the objectives in this plan. are essential for the successful implementation of bespoke tailoring floorspace. Where no trigger is listed, Key Performance of the City Plan’s strategic policies. It will also Indicators will be reviewed annually against the detail the timescales for delivery and funding Enforcement Authority Monitoring Report. mechanisms. The Infrastructure Delivery Planning enforcement is part of the end to end Statement (IDS) will monitor delivery of the process of development, from policy to the IDP and will be updated regularly. granting of permission through to monitoring and

174 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Monitoring Framework

Key Performance Indicators City Plan objectives Data source Trigger for review / review mechanism

1 Delivery of new homes (floorspace, units 1, 9 Westminster Delivery is 10% below target by size and tenure) against target of 1,495 City Council for three consecutive years new homes per year for the first ten years of the Plan period and 22,222 homes overall up to 2040

2 Delivery of affordable homes (floorspace, 1, 9 Westminster Total number of new affordable homes units and location of delivery) against target City Council does not meet target after five years of at least 35% of all new homes delivered

3 Delivery of homes through the Affordable 1, 9 Westminster Housing Fund (floorspace and units) City Council

4 Delivery of accommodation for elderly 1, 9 Westminster Review the SHMA for all accommodation people (floorspace and units) City Council types within five years

5 Delivery of office floor space across 2, 9 Westminster Net reduction in floor space the CAZ and opportunity areas City Council

6 Delivery of town centre floor space by type 2, 3, 9 Westminster Net reduction in floor space within the town centre hierarchy and CAZ City Council

7 Delivery of C1 Hotel floorspace 2, 3, 9 Westminster Net reduction in floor space City Council

8 Loss of public houses 3, 4 Westminster 15% loss of current number City Council

175 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS CONTENTS

9 Hot food takeaways permitted within 200m 9 Westminster Any permissions granted of a school City Council

10 Change in land uses in the Special Policy 3, 4, 6, 9 Westminster Areas (SPAs) City Council

11 Delivery of social and community 4, 6, 9 Westminster Annual review against IDP floorspace City Council

12 Delivery of play space in areas of 6, 8, 9 Westminster play space deficiency City Council

13 Change in number of jobs by sectors and 2, 3, 4 Westminster Net loss in total jobs and or increase in levels of worklessness City Council levels of worklessness

14 Employment, skills and training opportunities 2, 3, 4 Westminster Regular review with Westminster City secured through Section 106 contributions City Council Council employment service

15 Noise complaints received 7, 8 Westminster City Council

16 Delivery of public realm schemes 5, 8, 9 Westminster Review against IDP City Council

17 Utility infrastructure improvements and 8, 9 Westminster Review against IDP development City Council

18 Number of designated heritage assets 10 Westminster No loss City Council & Historic England

176 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS

19 Number of listed buildings, unlisted 10 Westminster Listed building consents for demolition. buildings of merit or non-designated City Council Committee reports referencing unlisted heritage assets completely demolished buildings of merit or non-designated heritage assets demolished

20 Number of planning applications approved 10 Westminster Database of applications impacting on the and refused with a Heritage Impact City Council World Heritage Site Assessment for development impacting on the Outstanding Universal Value of the World Heritage Site

21 Number of applications called in by the 10 Westminster Number of applications called in Secretary of State in relation to any City Council development that may have an impact on the Outstanding Universal Value of the World Heritage Site

22 Number of heritage assets at risk and 10 Historic England Less than 1% of total number of assets removed from the register

23 Harm or unauthorised works to 10 Westminster Enforcement action, prosecution on listed buildings City Council unauthorised works to listed buildings, planning contravention notices

24 Impact on key views 10 Westminster Number of breaches of height thresholds City Council within viewing corridors, protected vistas, strategic views

25 Effective policy for the 10 World Heritage Removal of the World Heritage Site from the World Heritage Site Committee annual reporting requirements of the World Heritage Committee

177 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 IMPLEMENTATION AND MONITORING CONTENTS CONTENTS

26 Delivery of walking and cycling 5, 9 Westminster Review against IDP infrastructure schemes City Council

27 Installation of electric vehicle charging 5, 9 Westminster Deterioration in quality or net loss points by type City Council

28 Number of applications approved for 5, 9 Westminster residential development without car parking City Council outside of parking zones B & F and impact on on-street parking stress

29 Delivery of car and cycle parking spaces 5 Westminster City Council

30 Applications that include renewable 7, 8 Westminster technologies City Council

31 Capacity of new waste and recycling 7, 8 Westminster facilities City Council

32 Applications granted planning permission 7, 8 Environment No more than 1% of applications permitted against Environment Agency advice on Agency flood risk

33 Reduction of NOx and carbon dioxide 7 DEFRA emissions, and particulate matter (PM2.5 and PM10) concentration against national and regional Air Quality targets

34 Net change in Sites of Importance for 8 Westminster Deterioration in quality or net loss Nature Conservation (SINCs) and City Council & designated open space GLA

178 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

35 Improvements to parks, play areas and 6, 8, 9 Westminster Review against IDP other open spaces City Council

36 Number of open spaces awarded the 8 Green Flag Green Flag Award Awards Website

37 Applications incorporating living 8, 9 Westminster walls and roofs City Council

179 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

APPENDICES Appendix 1: Key Development Sites The sites set out below are of strategic importance to the delivery of Sites which are under construction and expected to be completed by Westminster’s City Plan. It includes sites necessary for the delivery of major 2018 / 19 have been excluded. More detailed information for each site will be infrastructure projects, or for the regeneration of an area. It also includes included in the forthcoming Site Allocations Development Plan Document. residential sites which propose more than 50 units and housing renewal sites. Housing renewal figures are based on net gains.

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

1 4.43 Paddington St. Mary’s 500 Residential, POA; CAZ; 6-15 Historical pre-application discussions Hospital health Bayswater have taken place. Comprehensive infrastructure, Conservation development of the site is supported commercial Area, Grade II ideally through the creation of a new listed building masterplan which recognises the site’s role as a key driver for growth and a significant agent for place shaping, whilst respecting the listed building status and heritage value of a number of the incorporated blocks. In addition to the Grade II buildings, facade retention of a number of buildings should be considered. Principal existing uses are St Mary’s Hospital, Imperial Medical College of Science, Technology and Medicine.

180 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

2 6.54 Paddington Paddington N/A Transport POA; CAZ; 11-20 Station & infrastructure; Bayswater Environs public space Conservation mixed Area, Grade I commercial listed building

3 0.35 Paddington Travis 75 Residential, POA; CAZ 6-10 Development proposals for the site Perkins, commercial; should respond to the 2004 adopted 149-157 community Planning Brief. Pre application Harrow discussions took place in 2016. Road Development would be of a lower scale than the surrounding buildings with lower height values fronting the canal potentially increasing in height towards the Harrow Road.

181 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

4 1.45 Edgware Road Edgware 260 Residential, CAZ 6-10 These three sites on the Marylebone Road transport Flyover/Edgware Road junction should Station, infrastructure; be viewed as inter-related and any Capital mixed individual development proposal House & commercial, should help to facilitate comprehensive Griffith public space redevelopment of this area. As such any House individual site proposal should aide in delivering the full development potential of the other two sites. This approach should be reflected in any development proposals for example of terms of form, massing, appearance, public realm improvements and activation of the street scene in order to create a more cohesive place identity.

Capital House and Edgware Road Station

A mix of uses including transport infrastructure, residential, retail and commercial uses would be appropriate in conjunction with public space and public realm improvements including the potential creation of new entrance to Edgware Road station.

182 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

5 0.43 Edgware Paddington 225 Residential, Church Street 6-10 Development on this site should relate Road/ Church Exchange mixed HRA; CAZ to the Edgware Road/Marylebone Street commercial, Flyover cluster of key development sites public space and a tall, slender building could be appropriate on this site. A mix of uses including, residential, retail and commercial uses would be appropriate in conjunction with public space and public realm improvements.

183 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

6 0.62 Edgware Paddington 350 Residential, Church Street 6-10 Development on this site should relate Road/ Church Green mixed HRA; CAZ to the West End Gate scheme and to the Street Police commercial, Edgware Road/Marylebone Flyover Station public space cluster of key development sites. A tall, slender building could be appropriate on this site reflecting its prominent position on the Edgware Road/ Marylebone Flyover corner whilst any additional building should act as a contrast in terms of scale and reflect the lower height values along Harrow Road. Public realm and public space improvements that improve the quality of pedestrian movement are key in the acceptability of any scheme.

7 1.44 Church Street Church 190 Refer to Church Street 1-5 Development should relate to the Housing Street Site Church Street HRA Church Street Masterplan 2017 Renewal Area A Master plan 2017

8 1.67 Church Street Lilestone 83 Refer to Church Street 1-5 Development should relate to the Housing Street Church Street HRA Church Street Masterplan 2017 Renewal Area Master plan 2017

184 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

9 1.30 Church Street Church 130 Refer to Church Street 6-10 Development should relate to the Housing Street Site B Church Street HRA Church Street Masterplan 2017 Renewal Area Master plan 2017

10 1.44 Church Street Lisson 200 Refer to Church Street 6-10 Development should relate to the Housing Grove Church Street HRA Church Street Masterplan 2017 Renewal Area Master plan 2017

11 1.48 Church Street Church 205 Refer to Church Street 11-15 Development should relate to the Housing Street Site Church Street HRA Church Street Masterplan 2017 Renewal Area C Master plan 2017

12 0.90 Church Street Gateforth & 98 Refer to Church Street 11-15 Development should relate to the Housing Cockpit Church Street HRA Church Street Masterplan 2017 Renewal Area Theatre Master plan 2017

185 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

13 1.28 NWEDA Royal Oak 150 Residential, NWEDA; CAZ 11-15 When the Elizabeth line elements of the transport scheme are completed this will release infrastructure, the site for potential over-site office, mixed redevelopment. The site is significantly commercial constrained due to its close proximity to operational railway land, the Westway and the properties on Porchester Square and Westbourne Terrace which are Grade II listed. The irregular nature of the plot would also need to be addressed. While the site is located outside of a conservation area it is to the south of the Maida Vale Conservation Area and to the north of the Bayswater and Westbourne Conservation Areas.

14 0.61 NWEDA Westbourne 70 Residential, NWEDA 6-10 Park Bus commercial Garage

15 0.47 NWEDA Woodfield 110 Residential NWEDA 6-10 Road/ Elmfield Way

186 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

16 0.42 Victoria Terminus 100 Residential, VOA; CAZ, 11-15 The indicative residential number relates Place Transport Grade II listed to the partial redevelopment of the site infrastructure; building which could allow for the introduction of mixed a tall building of a slender form which commercial, would complement and help to frame public space the setting of Victoria Station and as a marker when viewed from Victoria Street.

Any redevelopment of this site will be accompanied by a planning brief.

Grade II Listed Buildings at this site include: Victoria Station Arcade including Nos. 15 and 16 Terminus Place, and Nos. 9-14 Terminus Place (facade only).

187 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

17 1.44 Victoria Victoria 350 Residential, VOA; CAZ, 11-15 The site has the potential to be Coach commercial, Belgravia comprehensively redeveloped. Any Station social, and Conservation proposal should respect the Grade II (Departures) public Area, Grade II listing of the transport buildings north spaces. listed building east quadrant which is considered to be a distinctive Art Deco landmark. A development proposal which explores the linkages and relationship to the Victoria Coach Station’s arrivals building which is also a key development site is encouraged.

18 0.25 Victoria Victoria 175 Residential, VOA; CAZ; 15-20 The site is enclosed on three sides by Coach commercial, Belgravia a mixture of commercial and residential Station outdoor Conservation uses with the primary entrance on (Arrivals) amenity Area Ecclestone Place. The site has the space potential to be a comprehensively redeveloped as a low scale residential led scheme. A development proposal which explores the linkages and relationship to the Victoria Coach Station’s departures building which is also a key development site is encouraged.

188 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

19 0.69 Victoria Ebury Gate/ 200 Residential, VOA; CAZ 11-15 Over-site development expected Belgrave transport once Crossrail 2 complete. Indicative House infrastructure; residential capacity based on partial mixed redevelopment of the site. commercial

20 4.99 Victoria Victoria N/A Transport VOA; CAZ 11-15 Victoria Railway Station: Grade II listed. Station and infrastructure; Grosvenor Environs mixed Gardens commercial Conservation Area, Grade II & Grade II* listed buildings

21 0.16 Victoria Portland 200 Residential, VOA; CAZ 15-20 Permission previously granted for House mixed conversion to residential. commercial

22 1.93 Ebury Bridge Ebury 414 Residential, Ebury Bridge 6-10 Permission previously granted for 435 Estate Bridge mixed HRA; CAZ; units, new scheme being developed Housing Estate commercial, Adjacent to which must deliver a comprehensive, Renewal Area community, Belgravia, high-quality renewal of the estate which public space Pimlico and meets the requirements of Policy 6. Peabody Avenue Conservation Areas

189 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

23 0.27 St. James’s Broadway 110 Residential, CAZ; 15-20 Complex transport Broadway & infrastructure Christchurch Gardens Conservation Area, Grade I listed building

24 0.24 Pimlico 8 & 11 85 Residential CAZ; Pimlico 11-15 Belgrave Conservation Road Area

25 1.00 Pimlico Queen 170 Residential, CAZ; Millbank 15-20 Historical pre-application discussions Alexandra cultural, and Conservation have taken place. Retention of the Military office use, Area; Thames existing buildings would be supported. Hospital green open Policy Area play space

190 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Map Site Area Site Name Indicative Expected Key Phase Notes ref size and number of uses designations of (ha) Address residential Plan units (net)

26 1.46 Knightsbridge Hyde Park 250 Residential, CAZ; MOL; 11-15 Site is reliant upon primary legislation Barracks on-site Royal Parks and the Ministry of Defence finding affordable, Conservation alternative stables. public space Area The scale of any potential redevelopment needs to be informed by the surrounding constraints including its location within Metropolitan Open Land. Public realm and public space improvements should be a key consideration in any scheme.

The Knightsbridge Neighbourhood Plan must also be consulted.

27 0.20 Soho Shaftesbury 70 Residential, WERLSPA; 11-15 Over-site development expected once Avenue transport Soho SPA; Crossrail 2 complete. Indicative infrastructure; CAZ; Soho residential capacity based on partial mixed Conservation redevelopment of the site. commercial Area (partial)

191 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Appendix 2: Parking Standards

In parking zones B & F, new residential Location Maximum parking provision development should not exceed the maximum residential parking standard of up to 0.4 spaces per unit and those standards under clauses B CAZ Car-free and D-H of the Draft London Plan Residential Inner London Opportunity Areas Parking policy. Metropolitan and Major Town Centres All areas of PTAL 5-6 Outside of these zones, clause A of Policy Inner London PTAL 4 T6.1 of the Draft London Plan will also apply. Inner London PTAL 3 Up to 0.25 spaces per unit Where parking spaces are provided, 50% of these spaces will provide active provision for Inner London PTAL 2 Up to 0.5 spaces per unit electric charging vehicles while the remaining spaces will incorporate passive provision. Inner London PTAL 0-1 Up to 0.75 spaces per unit

Where on-site parking is provided, spaces Where small units (generally studios and one-bedroom flats) make up a proportion of may be reserved for the sole and short-term let a development, parking provision should reflect the resultant reduction in demand so use for residents of the new development, with that provision across the site is less than 1.5 spaces per unit. spaces allocated to individual addresses or property numbers. Relevant maximum residential parking standards from the Draft London1 Plan

1 Refer to draft London Plan for full policy wording

192 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

Car clubs Cycle facilities Where parking is provided, free membership to a Showers, changing facilities and lockers should be Carplus accredited car club will be secured for the provided for cyclists at all new workplaces, places occupiers of all residential units. The demand for of further and higher education, hospitals and car club bays arising from this requirement should health facilities. At least one shower will be be assessed as part of the Transport Assessment installed for every 20 cycle parking spaces or Statement. If necessary, off-street parking will provided and one locker will be provided per be provided by the applicant in a publicly cycle space. These facilities will be conveniently accessible location. located in relation to the cycle parking spaces and accessible to all staff (and students where Parking for disabled persons applicable). Disabled parking for residential and non-residential Non-Residential Parking Standards uses should be provided in accordance with the Draft London Plan standards. In the case of non-residential parking standards including those for offices and retail uses – Draft Cycle and Motorcycle parking London Plan standards should be applied. Minimum cycle parking should be provided in accordance with the London Plan where they do not conflict with public realm enhancements. Motorcycle / moped parking should be provided in accordance with the Draft London Plan standards.

193 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

Appendix 3: Schedule of Strategic Policies

Schedule of Strategic Policies The policies within the City Plan are made up of both strategic and non-strategic elements. Strategic policies are those policies which address the strategic priorities of the area and any relevant cross-boundary issues, whereas non-strategic policies deal more with more localised issues. Where neighbourhood plans are being prepared, neighbourhood forums should ensure policies within them are in general conformity with these strategic policies.

This table sets out which policies in the City Plan are considered strategic and non-strategic based on national guidance and will guide groups in the development of their neighbourhood plans.

Policy Number Policy clause

1 Westminster’s Spatial Strategy Whole policy – strategic

2 WERLSPA Whole policy – strategic

3 Paddington OA Whole policy – strategic

4 Victoria OA Whole policy – strategic

5 NWEDA Whole policy – strategic

6 Church Street Whole policy – strategic

7 Managing development for Westminster’s people Whole policy – strategic

8 Stepping up housing delivery Whole policy – strategic

9 Affordable housing Whole policy – strategic

194 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

10 Affordable housing contributions in the CAZ Whole policy – strategic

11 Housing for specific groups Whole policy – strategic

12 Innovative housing Whole policy – non-strategic

13 Housing quality A, C – strategic B, D – non-strategic

14 Supporting economic growth A, B, D, E – strategic C – non-strategic

15 Town centres, high streets and the CAZ A, B, C, D, G, H, J – strategic E, F, I – non-strategic

16 Visitor economy Whole policy – strategic

17 Food, drink and entertainment Whole policy – strategic

18 Community Infrastructure & facilities Whole policy – strategic

19 Education & Skills A, B, D – strategic C – non-strategic

20 Digital infrastructure and information and communications technology A, B – strategic C, D – non-strategic

21 Soho Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

22 Mayfair & St James’s Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

195 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS CONTENTS

23 Harley Street Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

24 Savile Row Special Policy Area Whole policy – strategic

25 Sustainable Transport Whole policy – strategic

26 Walking and Cycling Whole policy – strategic

27 Public Transport and infrastructure Whole policy – strategic

28 Parking Whole policy – strategic

29 Highway access and management Whole policy – strategic

30 Freight and servicing Whole policy – strategic

31 Technological innovation in transport Whole policy – strategic

32 Waterways and waterbodies A,B,C,D – strategic E, F, G –non strategic

33 Air quality Whole policy – strategic

34 Local environmental impacts Whole policy – strategic

35 Green infrastructure Whole policy – strategic

36 Flood risk Whole policy – strategic

37 Energy Whole policy – strategic

196 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 APPENDICES CONTENTS

38 Waste management Whole policy – strategic

39 Design principles Whole policy – strategic

40 Westminster’s heritage A - Q – strategic R – non-strategic

41 Townscape & architecture Whole policy – strategic

42 Building height Whole policy – strategic

43 Building height in the housing renewal areas Whole policy – strategic

44 Public realm Whole policy – strategic

45 Security measures in the public realm Whole policy – strategic

46 Basement development A – strategic B – non-strategic

197 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS CONTENTS

GLOSSARY

Unless provided in the table below, definitions localities. Private external amenity space is Character detailed in the National Planning Policy Framework exclusively used by a single household; common The distinctive or typical quality of a building or and the London Plan apply. forms are balconies and gardens. Communal area; as described by historic fabric; appearance; external amenity space is exclusively used by the townscape; and land uses. Accessibility residents of a residential development; common The ability of all people, including elderly and forms are communal gardens, terraces and roof Civic amenity spaces disabled people, those with young children and gardens. Public amenity spaces are normally small Includes civic and market squares and other hard those carrying luggage and shopping, to reach, spaces where workers or visitors can relax, are surfaced community areas designed for move around and use places and facilities. used for dog walking, play, rest or quiet enjoyment, pedestrians with the primary purpose of providing or merely to provide visual amenity in densely a setting for civic buildings, and urban spaces for Active frontages built-up developments. public congregation and public events. A ground floor frontage which generates passing trade and provides a ‘shop-type’ window display Appropriate marketing Combined Heat and Power with interest at street level. Where a use has been prominently marketed The combined production of electricity and usable for the existing use, with reasonable terms and heat is known as Combined Heat and Power Affordable housing conditions, as certified by an appropriately (CHP). Steam or hot water, which would otherwise Housing for sale or rent, for those whose needs qualified professional, independently verified be rejected when electricity alone is produced, is are not met by the market. In Westminster this is by the council at the applicant’s expense. used for space or process heating. split into ‘social’ and ‘intermediate’ types. Central Activities Zone (CAZ) Commercial use / development / floorspace Ambient noise A diverse area covering much of central London Comprises all A uses, all B uses, C1 Hotels, private C3 Ongoing sound in the environment such as from and extending across 10 London boroughs, as hospitals, private D1 Non-residential institutions such transport and industry, as distinct from individual designated by an indicative boundary in the as medical care and schools, private D2 Assembly events, such as a noisy all-night party. Unless London Plan. and leisure such as private gyms and clubs, and stated otherwise, noise includes vibration. commercial sui generis uses in accordance with the CAZ retail clusters Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order and Amenity spaces Clusters of retail activity within the CAZ that have its subsequent amendments. Private, communal or public external spaces that been designated through the London Plan or the provide opportunities for informal activities which City Plan. contribute to the appearance of developments or

198 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS

Community facilities / infrastructure record companies, and all kinds of publishers Designing out crime Facilities / infrastructure available to the local including software, computer games and Using the design of the built environment to community. These consist of buildings and electronic publishing. minimise opportunities for criminal and anti-social external spaces and can be publicly or privately behaviour, through matters such as provision of –– Creative Experience: includes enterprises run. They include health facilities; education appropriate layout, active frontages, suitable whose core business model is based around facilities; social services uses; sports and lighting etc. selling the right for consumers to witness or recreation facilities; community meeting halls; experience specific activities, performances youth centres; local arts facilities, and public District Heating Network (DHN) or locations e.g. live theatre, music, opera toilets. The majority of community facilities / A network of pipes carrying that connects energy and dance. infrastructure fall within C2 (Residential production equipment with energy customers. Institutions), D1 (Non-residential Institutions) and –– Creative Originals: includes enterprises based They can range from several metres to several D2 (Assembly and Leisure) use classes. on the manufacture, production or sale of kilometres in length. physical artefacts, the value of which derive Comparison goods from their perceived creative or cultural value District centre Predominantly durable goods and services where and exclusivity e.g. designer fashion, bespoke Service centre, usually with up to one hundred customers may wish to compare prices / quality / tailoring, craft-based activities such as jewellery commercial premises of various kinds, with a type of product sold, with other similar products and arts and antiques. predominantly retail function. sold in other shops. Comparison goods retail use –– Creative Services: includes enterprises based falls within A1 Retail use class. Entertainment uses around providing Creative Services for clients Uses predominantly or partly used for earning revenues in exchange for giving up Convenience goods entertainment purposes: it includes D2 uses their time and intellectual property e.g. Basic goods or services which people may need including live music venues and sui generis uses architects, advertising agencies, graphic on a weekly, if not daily, basis. Convenience goods including nightclubs, casinos, amusement arcades design, new media design and post production. retailers include grocers and newsagents and fall and shisha premises. The entertainment uses that within A1 Retail use class. are not considered within this definition are sports Custom-build halls, swimming baths, gymnasiums, skating rinks, Custom build homes are where an individual or Creative industries other indoor or outdoor sports or recreation areas, group work with a specialist developer to help Generic term for the following sub-groups: concert halls, cinemas and theatres. deliver their homes and they can input in the design –– Creative Content: includes enterprises that of their home or customise elements of it. The Essential infrastructure produce intellectual property, usually copyright developer may help to find a plot, manage the Essential transport and utility infrastructure protected, distributed to customers and construction and arrange the finance for the project. (including mass evacuation routes, electricity audiences through sales, advertising or generating power stations and water treatment subscription to earn revenue e.g. broadcasters, works) and wind turbines. As set out in the

199 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS CONTENTS

Technical Guidance to the National Planning Gross floorspace –– emergency dispersal points; Policy Framework. Method of assessing the extent of building (or –– basement dwellings; land) occupied by a use. This should be measured Evening economy as Gross Internal Area in accordance with the RICS –– caravans, mobile homes and park homes Economic activity where main business hours are Code of Measuring Practice, or subsequent intended for permanent residential use; and between 6pm and midnight (e.g. restaurants, replacement professional guidance, but excluding –– installations requiring hazardous substances theatres, public houses). the following areas: consent as set out in the Technical Guidance to –– voids in atria; the National Planning Policy Framework. Family housing A housing unit with between three and five –– internal lightwells; Highway bedrooms. For affordable housing, units with two –– double or triple height areas should be An area of land to allow the public to move along a bedrooms may be considered suitable for families, measured only once; route. Includes the carriageway (for vehicles) and but this will be at the discretion of the council the footway (for pedestrians). The council (and in based on need on the council’s waiting lists and –– screened or unroofed plant areas, plant rooms, places the Royal Parks and Transport for London) the size of the unit. substation rooms, and other operational voids are the highway authority, responsible for not reasonably capable of commercial or maintaining the highway. Flood-related infrastructure residential use; Includes infrastructure to defend against and –– internal and external car and cycle parking Historic fabric manage flooding from a number of sources areas and associated facilities; Surviving original and historic fabric in the form of including tidal, fluvial and surface water flooding, buildings, their structure, details and decoration. such as the Embankment Wall and Thames Tunnel. –– servicing bays, vehicle circulation and areas exclusively reserved for refuse and recycling Host scheme Freight consolidation centre storage and handling. The development is the one which forms the A facility for the collection of goods from a number original application which triggers a requirement of recipients, that are then sorted into fewer Highly vulnerable uses for affordable housing and which is first assessed vehicles for the final leg of the journey, in order to Relating to flood risk. Uses include: for whether it can provide on-site affordable reduce the overall number of freight movements. –– police stations, ambulance stations and fire housing in whole or part. stations and command centres and Greenfield run off rates telecommunications; Human scale development The runoff (due to rainfall) that would occur from a Development of a scale and form suitable for site in its undeveloped and undisturbed states. –– installations required to be operational during people to interact with and where pedestrians feel flooding; comfortable by the scale and massing of buildings and open spaces making up the public realm.

200 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS

Idling Legibility Major development Unnecessarily running a motor vehicles engine The degree to which a place can be easily Development greater than or equal to: when the vehicle is not in motion. understood and moved through. –– 10 residential units; or Infill development Linear open spaces –– 0.5 hectares site area (residential) or 1 hectare The insertion of one or more new buildings within Open spaces and towpaths alongside the Thames, (non-residential); or a continuous street façade or frontage. canals and other waterways; paths; disused –– gross floorspace of 1,000 sq m (GIA). railways; nature conservation areas; and other Intermediate housing routes that provide opportunities for informal Major centre Homes for private rent provided at a cost at least recreation. Often characterised by features or Predominantly retail centre providing a range of 20% below market rents (including service charges attractive areas which are not fully accessible to the services to a wide catchment area. where applicable) or low-cost homes for sale as public but contribute to the enjoyment of the space. defined in the NPPF, provided to households who Meanwhile use meet the council’s income thresholds. Local distinctiveness Short-term use of temporarily empty buildings The positive features of a place and its such as shops until they can be brought back into International centre communities which contribute to its special commercial use. Town centre at the top of London’s town centre character and sense of place. hierarchy of international reputation and attracting Metropolitan open land global visitors. Local service provider Strategically important open space defined in the Westminster City Council, the National Health London Plan. In Westminster, this comprises the In-vessel composting Service or related organisations such as a Primary Royal Parks – St James’s Park, Hyde Park, An industrial form of composting biodegradable Care Trust, the Metropolitan Police, Registered Kensington Gardens, Green Park and Regent’s waste within an enclosed container, where Provider and other public sector services such as Park. Metropolitan Open Land is afforded the conditions such as air flow, temperature and job centres and courts, and voluntary sector same protection as green belt land. emissions are controlled. organisations operating within the city. These are public social and community uses. Modular homes Land use swaps and packages Pre-engineered building units that are delivered Where two (land use swap) or more (land use Local centre and assembled as large or volumetric components package) sites are considered as a single Small town centre, usually containing convenience or as substantial parts of a building. These can application for the purposes of determining a goods shops, local service uses, restaurants, cafés include whole rooms, parts of rooms, or separate planning application. These are used to meet the and pubs, mainly providing facilities for people highly serviced units such as toilets or lifts. Off-site policy objectives required over more than one site. living or working nearby. construction refers to buildings, structures or parts manufactured (and wholly or partially assembled)

201 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS CONTENTS

away from the site before installation in their Open space surveys address daytime and weekday overnight final position. All land in Westminster that is predominantly parking, and include bays that residents’ permits undeveloped other than by buildings or structures can be used during the day (i.e. residents’ and Neighbourhood forum that are ancillary to the open space use. It includes shared use bays only) and all other spaces that A community group of residents and / or a broad range of types of open space within the can be parked in without paying overnight (i.e. all businesses that has been established to prepare city, in public or private ownership and whether visitor bays and single yellow lines that are not a neighbourhood plan for their designated area. public access is unrestricted, limited or restricted. otherwise restricted).

Night-time economy Includes all parks and gardens, regardless of size Pedestrian clear zone Economic activity that occurs between midnight (whether public or private); the River Thames and The area available for the pedestrians (including and 7am, e.g. late-night bars, casinos, night-clubs. the canals and their towpaths; civic spaces; users of wheelchairs, prams and buggies) to walk children’s playgrounds, including school without obstruction. Also known as the ‘clear Noise sensitive receptors playgrounds; ballcourts and other outdoor sports footway width’. The useable zone accommodates Comprises residential use, educational facilities; amenity green spaces, such as open the flow of pedestrians between the street establishments, hospitals, hotels, hostels, concert spaces on housing estates; churchyards; and furniture zones (and space to use the street halls, theatres, law courts, and broadcasting and community gardens. furniture) at the back of footway (if any) and that recording studios. placed adjacent to the kerb (if any). The minimum Opportunity areas width for any new design should be two metres Non-self-contained homes Areas defined in the London Plan with good public but may need to be greater when foot traffic is A home with some shared space or facilities transport accessibility that provide London’s more intense. In intensely used locations it may e.g. with a private bedroom but shared bathroom, principle opportunities for accommodating large- have to be the full width available, even if this is kitchen and / or living room. scale development. The Areas will provide less than the desirable width for the peak time foot substantial numbers of new employment and traffic if it were being designed today. Off-street parking housing opportunities. Dedicated parking that is provided away from the Platform based delivery street, which can include garages, driveways, surface Original building Delivery of goods ordered via the internet or level and multi-storey or basement car parks. In relation to a building existing on 1 July 1948, as mobile applications; e.g. Just Eat, Deliveroo etc. existing on that date and in relation to a building On-street parking built on or after 1st July 1948, as so built. Pocket parks Parking that is permitted on the street as opposed Small areas of open space that provide natural to within a designated car park. Parking stress area surfaces and shaded areas for informal play and Area where annual parking surveys indicate 80% passive recreation that sometimes have seating and higher usage throughout the day / night, in and play equipment, with a size guide of under compliance with any restrictions that exist. Parking 0.4 hectares.

202 CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 GLOSSARY CONTENTS

Predominantly commercial neighbourhoods Retail frontage Importance are those identified to have an Areas of the Central Activities Zone where the A street level frontage characterised by a importance to Westminster and any damage would majority of ground floor uses comprise of a range predominance of shop-type premises. mean a significant loss to the city. of commercial activity. Self-build A site of Local Importance is identified because of Protected species Self-build projects are defined as those where its value to the nearby community, especially in Certain plant and animal species protected to someone directly organises the design and areas that are deficient in wildlife sites. various degrees in law, particularly the Wildlife and construction of their own home. This covers a wide Countryside Act, 1981 (as amended). range of projects from a traditional DIY self-build Small open spaces home to projects where the self-builder employs Gardens, sitting-out areas, children’s play spaces Public realm someone to build their home for them. Community- or other areas of a specialist nature, including The parts of the city in either public or private led projects can also be defined as self-build. nature conservation areas, with a size guide of ownerships which are available free for everyone under two hectares. to use or see, including streets, squares and parks. Sense of place The unique perception of a place created by its Social housing Rapid inundation zone local buildings, streets, open spaces and activities. This includes housing owned by local authorities Low-lying areas close to the River Thames which The more distinctive the place the greater the and private registered providers for which the rent would rapidly inundate (flood) to significant levels if sense of it being special. A character which is is set in accordance with the Government’s rent the Embankment Wall was breached. greater than the sum of the constituent parts. policy for social rent or London Living Rent (as defined in the London Plan). It may also be owned Registered providers Shoulder hours by other persons and provided under equivalent Registered Providers are owners and managers of Those hours that book-end peak times e.g. rental arrangements to the above, as agreed with affordable housing whom are regulated by 6am–7am or 10am–11am for the morning peak. the local authority or with Homes England. Government. Most operate on a not-for-profit basis and use any trading surplus to maintain existing Sites of Importance for Nature Soundscape homes and to help finance new ones. Registered Conservation (SINCs) The overall quality of an acoustic environment as a Providers can include the council, housing The Greater London Authority designated SINCs place for human experience. Soundscape design associations, housing trusts and cooperatives, to highlight areas of ecological value that are rich might include preserving, reducing or eliminating registered charities, or non-profit making provident in wildlife within the city. The sites are graded as certain sounds or combining and balancing societies or companies. being of Metropolitan, Borough or Local sounds to create or enhance an attractive and Importance. Sites of Metropolitan Importance are stimulating acoustic environment. those which contain the best examples of London’s habitats and rare species that are of significance to London. Sites of Borough

203 CONTENTS catering for old or vulnerable people who have who people vulnerable or for old catering extra-care ofsupport; level alow no,have or sheltered accommodation where occupants the include can and Class Use C3 the into fall necessarily not may It people. byolder occupation Housing that is intended specifically for for people housing older Specialist areas uses. sui generis classified or Classes, Use C3 and C2 the within fall These problems, accommodation. or other supported health or mental disabilities, learning or physical including people with people, elderly students, special needs housing forOccupation, with those Multiple Houses in Affordable hostels, housing, housing Specialist – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY A scheme manager and in-house care teamA scheme manager and in-house high levels including of dementia. impairment, or mental age or illness have sensory physical, of byreason who for people accommodation residential care providing non-self-contained care; residentialworkers, domiciliary / nursing and classes and a basefacilities for care health fitness provision, ofmeal kind some or restaurant a activities, centre day room, laundry room, resident’s lounge, a guest support, to emergency access 24-hour e.g. provided be may of facilities –arange impairment health mental or cognitive or foreseeable sensory,an existing physical,

Risk Assessment. been modelled in Westminster’s Strategic Flood breachdefence flood tidal in the These havewalk. occur a for will flooding to which depth Predicted level flood breach Tidal lower). is (whichever height context prevailing the twice than more or meters, 30 than ofmore A building Tall building vehicles. and electric occupancy and licensedlight rail / tram cabs; and high underground, ferry, coaches, passenger buses, including rail, public transport movement; means of non-vehicular andWalking, other cycling modes transport Sustainable sewers. and drains into directly runs that water ratesurface of and flow volume, total the reduces that away in hardstandings and from buildings water manage run-off that surface drainage techniques and measuresSustainable drainage systems Sustainable package. accommodation ofthe part critical care or nursing is and a personal residents to provided are all routinely services personal provide a consistent presence, meals and

against significant harm or harm exploitation. significant against themselves after to look unable be may or is, and illness; or age ofdisability, byreason support or / and ofcare need in be may or is who Someone Vulnerable people road. main the on pedestrians and vehicles cyclists, to see road aminor on traffic allows that junction or access ofan Feature splays Visibility supply. land housing year five the or Sites Development Key identified the in included not is for and planned been not has that Development Windfall development and visitors. talent businesses, tocontinues attract West in the End, so it investment secure further sector, to and seeks resident that communities, private and public the between A partnership (WEP) West Partnership End facilities. watersports and piers moorings, boat e.g. to function location awaterside require that Uses Water related uses galleries and parks. cafés, museums, waterside e.g. restaurants, to the people attract can that but location, require doUses that not necessarily a waterfront Waterfront enhancing uses

GLOSSARY 204

CONTENTS APPENDICES CONTENTS

205 CONTENTS

will contribute to the delivery delivery to the contribute will Plan City Westminster’s STRATEGIES WESTMINSTER’S of other strategies. of other council’sof the suite CITY PLAN 2019 – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY

D

e

c

e

n

L

t

r o

a

c

l

i a

s

I l

e

m E d

H

p

l

n e

e

e a

m

l r

t

g

e

a h

M y

n

t

n a

W

W d

t

a

i

o

e

s

P n s

t

e

t e

m

r

l

p

l l

i b a

n

l

a

e 3 n

s

f n

P A

i

t

n

e

S g

D :

C r

o

a

t r

r

e

i

t

t

t

h

r

n

l

C y

i a

C e v e

t

e

r e

s

o r

g C

h

P y

i

u

f y t

h

i

A o y p n

u

c

o

l

r

a

c i

W r

A l

W f

p 2 n S h

p

i

o r

Q r

e

e

t 0

r

s

s

e a

1 H

t

9

t

c e u

m

m o

O o t h / M t a

u 2

i

i

l n

n s

i

0

t

i

s

s a n A y

–

t

s t S g

e

e 2 t

e

2 r p

( r

0 c

P r e t

t

2

r

W

i 2

S n a

0

o

1

l

0 t

e

/

a 1

P n e

2

7

s

(

n

1

g

p

–

t ( 2 4

m ( y

a A 2 l

2

)

a

c

i

0 n D 2 0

2 n

e

s

2

1 C 0 r

a s

t

a

8

e

( 2

1

f 0

) i

N r

8 t

C t ( ) n 1

o 2

) y 3

B d

2

o m

0

– 0 i

m

s f

1

2

1

S

e o i 7

u

5 o 0

) n

) d r

1

i

t

( 8

t i r

C y

v A a

e

t

2 E e

r l

o

c g 0

s l

h o

2 y i

1 e

n t

3 i y

o s

i

m )

0

o

W n

1

i e R n

D c 0

–

e 2 e

p

v

L 0

s

o e o

1 t

c

l r

(

5

m o

( t a

p

F l

i

2

m 2

n

l 0

0 o s e

1

o

n t

1

8

e R d 0 F t

)

( r

)

r

i

a s H

2

M k m

o

0

u

e

s 1

w a

i

9

n

n

o

S g

a

)

r

g ( k

e t

r

m a

2

t

0 e e

g n 1

S

5 D y

S t a

f

)

e

t W r i

r r

e a

c t

e

e

t

s

i g

o t

m

2 y o n

i

n

s

T f 0

t

e

1 W

P r

r 7

a e

–

s v

a

2

t e

m

r

0 t

S l

n i

n

2

e

s

t

( 2 r t a

e

s

t C r

h

e

2 i

S p

m

i

0 t

C y

e

1

t

7 n

r

S a

o

(

t ) t

a

t

u

e

t

2 n e

g

c m

0

2 y i

e

S l

1

n

5

o t t

0

r

)

a

1 C f

t

7

e

–

o g

2 m

i

P c

0

m

2

u

l

S

( n

0 a

t

i a 2 n

t

t I y

e

2

m

n

0 0

e

v

1 n

1

o

7

o t 7

l

–

v

)

L f e

2

m

0

i c

e

2

e

n n

( 0

s ( t

i n

2

2

P g

0

0

S

1

o

1

t

4

a

l

7

i t

)

c e )

(

m y

e

2

n

o t

0

1

A n 6

)

ff

f

o APPENDICES

r

d

a

b

l H e

o

u

S s

t

i r

n a

t

P g

e

g

i

F c

o

l

i l

o c

o

i

e

R d

( s

i s 2

A k

0

1

s

7 s

e )

s

s m

e

n

2 t

0

1

( W 6

a

l

2 k

i n 0

S g

1

6

t

r ) a

t e

g

2 y

0

1

7

–

2

0

2

( 7

2 0 1 7 )

CONTENTS

Active W estm inster S trategy ( 2018– 2022) ( 2018) ( Draft ) Mar Gre kets S ene trate r Cit gy (2 y Ac 019) tion P Mu Dra lan 2 nic ft S 01 ipa urf 5–2 l W ace W 025 ( as a 20 te M ter M 19) an an ag ag em em en ent P t S lan 2 S tra p teg 011 ec y 2 ia 0 lis 16– t H 20 o 31 ( us C 2 in yc 01 g S lin 4) tr g S at tr eg ate y f gy ( H or O 2 o 0 m ld 14 e e ) le r P S ss e t n op ra e l t s e ( e E s S 2 g n t 0 ic F e ra 12 rg te ) lo y S g o y ( d R t e ra m te e is g rg k A y 2 in s g) s 0 e 19 ( A E s i le s e r Q c m m tr e e E u i n rg a c V t 2 i c l n o it e 0 g) n y A h 1 o i 9 ( m c c le S e i t m c O io e n P tr rg

p a i t n A p la e g)

o n 2 g

y ( r C t

u 0 e

n m i

1 t

i 9 e t y

y S –

C rg 2

u 0 in f t o

lt r 2 g) u a

4 ( r

r t

a e g e A

L l S m

o y (

t e l c r e r l a a m g l F t i e e n g r g) o y 2 g o in t b 0 g) ( a 2 l l F 0 2 B – 0 u a 2 1 9 i c 4 ( l i ) t F l i t e i a e m c s P e i l r P i g t l l i a i a e n n ( y s S g) D i n e e g P t m m r a e e t i e r t n g c g t i L h S n i y ( a S i g) g e h t r m t t a r i n a t e e g S t r e g g

g i y ( n

t y (

r g) e a

e t m

e m e g

e r y ( g r g i

e n i n m g)

g) (

e

r

g 2

i 0 n

g) ( 1

9

)

2

0

1

9

)

D

e

c

e

n

L

t

r o

a

c

l

i a

s

I l

e

m E d

H

p

l

n e

e

e a

m

l r

t

g

e

a h

M y

n

t

n a

W

W d t

a

i

o

e

s

P n s

t

e

t e

m

r

l

p

l l

i b a

n

l

a

e 3 n

s

f n

P A

i

t

n

e

S g

D :

C r o

a

t r

r

e

i

t

t

t

h

r

n

l

C y

i a

C e v e

t

e

r e

s

o r

g C

h

P y

i

u

f y t

h

i

A o y p n

u

c

o

l

r

a

c i

W r

A l

W f

p 2 n S h

p

i

o r

Q r

e

e

t 0

r

s

s

e a

1 H

t

9

t

c e u

m

m o

O o t h / M t a

u 2

i

i

l n

n s

i

0

t

i

s

s a n A y

–

t

s t S g

e

e 2 t

e

2 r p

( r

0 c

P r e t

t

2

r

W

i 2

S n a

0

o

1

l

0 t

e

/

a 1

P n e

2

7

s

(

n

1

g

p

–

t ( 2 4

m ( y

a A 2 l

2

)

a

c

i

0 n D 2 0

2 n

e

s

2

1 C 0 r

a s

t

a

8

e

( 2

1

f 0

) i

N r

8 t

C t ( ) n 1

o 2

) y 3

B d

2

o m

0

– 0 i

m

s f

1

2

1

S

e o i 7

u

5 o 0

) n

) d r

1

i

t

( 8

t i r

C y

v A a

e

t

2 E e

r l

o

c g 0

s l

h o

2 y i

1 e

n t

3 i y

o s

i

m )

0

o

W n

1

i e R n

D c 0

–

e 2 e

p

v

L 0

s

o e o

1 t

c

l r

(

5

m o

( t a

p

F l

i

2

m 2

n

l 0

0 o s e

1

o

n t

1

8

e R d 0 F t

)

( r

)

r

i

a s H

2

M k m

o

0

u

e

s 1

w a

i

9

n

n

o

S g

a

)

r

g ( k

e t

r

m a

2

t

0 e e

g n 1

S

5 D y

S t a

f

)

e

t W r i

r r

e a

c t

e

e

t

s

i g

o t

m

2 y o n

i

n

s

T f 0

t

e

1 W

P r

r 7

a e

–

s v

a

2

t e

m

r

0 t

S l

n i

n

2

e

s

t

( 2 r t a

e

s

t C r

h

e

2 i

S p

m

i

0 t

C y

e

1

t

7 n

r

S a

o

(

t ) t

a

t

u

e

t

2 n e

g

c m

0

2 y i

e

S l

1

n

5

o t t

0

r

)

a

1 C f

t

7

e

–

o g

2 m

i

P c

0

m

2

u

l

S

( n

0 a

t

i a 2 n

t

t I y

e

2

m

n

0 0

e

v

1 n

1

o

7

o t 7

l

–

v

)

L f e

2

m

0

i c

e

2

e

n n

( 0

s ( t

i n

2

2

P g

0

0

S

1

o

1

t

4

a

l

7

i t

)

c e )

(

m y

e

2

n

o t

0

1

A n 6

)

ff

f

o

r

d

a

b

l H e

o

u

S s

t

i r

n a

t

P g

e

g

i

F c

o

l

i l

o c

o

i

e

R d

( s

i s 2

A k

0

1

s

7 s

e )

s

s m

e

n

2 t

0

1

( W 6

a

l

2 k

i n 0

S g

1

6

t

r ) a

t e

g

2 y

0

1

7

–

2

0

2

( 7

2 0 1 7 )

CONTENTS

Acti ve Wes tminste r Strat egy (20 18–202 2) ( – 2040 2019 PLAN CITY 2018) ( Draft ) Mar Gre kets S ene trate r Cit gy (2 y Ac 019) tion P Mu Dra lan 2 nic ft S 01 ipa urf 5–2 l W ace W 025 ( as a 20 te M ter M 19) an an ag ag em em en ent P t S lan 2 S tra p teg 011 ec y 2 ia 0 lis 16– t H 20 o 31 ( us C 2 in yc 01 g S lin 4) tr g S at tr eg ate y f gy ( H or O 2 o 0 m ld 14 e e ) le r P S ss e t n op ra e l t s e ( e E s S 2 g n t 0 ic F e ra 12 rg te ) lo y S g o y ( d R t e ra m te e is g rg k A y 2 in s g) s 0 e 19 ( A E s i le s e r Q c m m tr e e E u i n rg a c V t 2 i c l n o it e 0 g) n y A h 1 o i 9 ( m c c le S e i t m c O io e n P tr rg

p a i t n A p la e g)

o n 2 g

y ( r C t

u 0 e

n m i

1 t

i 9 e t y

y S –

C rg 2

u 0 in f t o

lt r 2 g) u a

4 ( r

r t

a e g e A

L l S m

o y (

t e l c r e r l a a m g l F t i e e n g r g) o y 2 g o in t b 0 g) ( a 2 l l F 0 2 B – 0 u a 2 1 9 i c 4 ( l i ) t F l i t e i a e m c s P e i l r P i g t l l i a i a e n n ( y s S g) D i n e e g P t m m r a e e t i e r t n g c g t i L h S n i y ( a S i g) g e h t r m t t a r i n a t e e g S t r e g g

g i y ( n

t y (

r g) e a

e t m

e m e g

e r y ( g r g i

e n i n m g)

g) (

e

r

g 2

i 0 n

g) ( 1

9

)

2 APPENDICES

0

1

9

) 207 To find out more about the City Plan please visit westminster.gov.uk/cityplan2040